Design your survey Archives | SnapSurveys Support documentation for Snap Surveys products Thu, 21 Nov 2024 15:15:50 +0000 en-GB hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.5 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/favicon-32x32-1.png Design your survey Archives | SnapSurveys 32 32 Designing accessible surveys https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/designing-accessible-surveys/ Mon, 28 Oct 2024 14:25:15 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=12531 Watch this 30-minute pre-recorded webinar to understand how WCAG 2.2 guidelines can make your surveys accessible to everyone.

The post Designing accessible surveys appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>

Watch this 30-minute pre-recorded webinar to understand how WCAG 2.2 guidelines can make your surveys accessible to everyone. Dive into accessibility essentials, from visual and auditory to cognitive and mobility support. See how implementing these standards extends your reach and improves usability on all devices. By adhering to WCAG 2.2 and aligning with US Section 508 and EN 301-549 standards, you’re not just meeting compliance—you’re committing to inclusivity, ensuring every voice is heard.

Related help

Creating an accessible version of your questionnaire

The post Designing accessible surveys appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Show as Buttons https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/show-as-buttons/ Thu, 10 Oct 2024 12:49:22 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=12172 This feature lets you show closed question choices as clickable buttons. This includes using images instead of labels. You also have the option to show or remove the check box. This is available for Single Choice, Multi Choice and Grid questions. Showing the labels as buttons The As Buttons option is available in the Show […]

The post Show as Buttons appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
This feature lets you show closed question choices as clickable buttons. This includes using images instead of labels. You also have the option to show or remove the check box. This is available for Single Choice, Multi Choice and Grid questions.

Showing the labels as buttons

The As Buttons option is available in the Show toolbar topic.

  1. Select the Single Choice, Multi Choice or Grid question.
  2. Select Show from the toolbar topic menu.
  3. Select As Buttons from the next drop-down.
  1. Select the Show checkbox. This enables the Options button.
  2. Click on the Options button. This opens the Code labels as buttons dialog where you can customise the appearance of the question.

Choose the colours

You can change the text and background colours displayed for both the unselected and selected labels.

  1. Click the colour drop down to select the text or background colour.
  2. Select the colour or click More Colours to create custom colours.
  3. Click OK to save the changes.

Check that the colours are correct by previewing the questionnaire.

Choose the border

You can choose whether to show a border around the active code label, and set the properties of the border style.

  1. Select the Use border check box. This enables the border options.
  2. There are 4 border style options
    • Rounded border gives a round shape at the each end of the border.
    • Add margins adds space around the code label text.
    • Text only changes the border width to the width of each code label text.
    • Reduce width decreases the code label size to the largest text width of the code labels.
  3. Choose the border colour that is shown when labels are selected or unselected.
  4. Click OK to save the changes.

Check that the border appearance is correct by previewing the questionnaire.

Default border

When you select Use border, this will show the default border options.

This displays the code labels with a square border, no margins at the top and bottom. If the question has multiple columns, the labels are equally spaced across the page.

Rounded border

Selecting the Rounded border option, shows the buttons with rounded ends.

Add margins

Selecting the Add Margins option, adds a margin at the top and bottom of the text and/or image.

Text only

Selecting the Text Only option, shows the border around the code label text without spacing.

Reduce width

Selecting the Reduce width option, moves the labels closer together and does not use the full page. The label border reduces to the width of the code label border to the width of the longest text.

If both Reduce width and Text only options are selected then the label border widths are defined by the Text only option.

Append box image

You can display a checkbox using either the Off image or the On image, which shows when the code label is selected.

For example, when the On image is selected, this is shown after the code label text on the selected codes.

Displaying with no columns

You can also display the code labels adjacent to each other, without any columns. This uses the Columns settings.

  1. Select Columns in the topic drop-down.
  2. Select the None button.

During the interview each code label displays adjacent to the next across the full width of the page.

Examples

Image only

Label only

Image and Label

The post Show as Buttons appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using the Single Edition Template https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-the-single-edition-template/ Mon, 30 Sep 2024 14:24:07 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=12359 There are a wide range of different screen sizes that respondents can use to complete your questionnaire. These vary from larger widescreen monitors to small mobile phones. When designing a questionnaire or form, it’s important to consider which devices a respondent might use. Traditional approach Snap Surveys traditional approach is to create a survey that […]

The post Using the Single Edition Template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
There are a wide range of different screen sizes that respondents can use to complete your questionnaire. These vary from larger widescreen monitors to small mobile phones. When designing a questionnaire or form, it’s important to consider which devices a respondent might use.

Traditional approach

Snap Surveys traditional approach is to create a survey that makes use of different editions. The edition presented to the respondent is based upon the screen size of the device they are using. This allows the designer to specify how questions are formatted, and which images and logos are displayed. For example a respondent using a larger device sees a wide banner, whereas someone using a smaller device, sees a smaller image which fits the screen without the need to zoom in or out.

This approach provides the respondent with a more tailored view, but involves greater design work. It involves the designer deciding how the project will appear on multiple devices, such as, phones, tablets and monitors. In addition, some features must be added to each edition individually. For example, if all screen sizes require a page break then the designer must add this to each edition.

Single Edition Template

In many scenarios, there are minimal differences between the editions. This leads to the extra effort required to consider all the editions giving little perceived benefit. For this reason, Snap XMP now offers a Single Edition Template with just one online edition that can fit multiple screen sizes. As with all our supplied templates, there is also a Paper Edition.

Single Edition vs Multiple Editions

As with any ‘one size fits all’ approach, there are times when you may require a more custom fit. Here are some considerations to help you decide whether to use the Single Edition Template or a multiple edition template.

Logos and Images

The size of the images and logos affects which option may be best for your project. Typically we would recommend a maximum image size of 600px, scaled (zoomed down) to 50%.

In a Single Edition Template, the width of the questionnaire or form will be the widest image on the page. Using the Single Edition Template works best when your images and logo’s fit on a smaller phone screen (in portrait mode), without the need to zoom out. If they are wider than this, a respondent using a phone will have to either zoom out to see everything on the screen, or scroll left and right to view the full question text.

If you have wider images and logo’s, a multiple edition questionnaire or form displays different images on different sized devices. For example, a larger banner would be shown on a PC, Laptop or Tablet device, and a different smaller image would be viewed on a smaller phone sized device.

Grid Questions (Rating Scales)

Grid question and answer formats can affect which option to choose.

These can include:

  • Long questions
  • Long answer labels
  • Large number of answer labels

With a multiple edition template, a grid question displays as an individual drop-down menu on a phone sized device. This makes it easier to see all the answers on a smaller screen.

In the Single Edition Template, the question remains in a grid format. On a smaller screen, the question rows and answers are moved closer together to try and fit the screen. This means that longer question and answer text, or a larger number of possible answers can become too close together and difficult to read. If this is the case, it is preferable to use the ‘Carousel’ question style, which makes better use of a smaller screen when there are larger amounts of question and answer text.

If your grid question has a smaller answer set, such as, a simple Yes | No, then the standard grid question style within the Single Edition Template works well on both larger and smaller devices.

The post Using the Single Edition Template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using the Page paradata variable for a Tabbed Questionnaire design https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-tabbed-pages/ Thu, 11 Jul 2024 11:40:32 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=12050 You can use the Page paradata variable to handle page navigation as an alternative or additional to Next and Back buttons. You control the content that is displayed by setting page breaks and the respondent selects the page by selecting a code in the Page paradata variable. Enable the Page paradata variable For surveys created […]

The post Using the Page paradata variable for a Tabbed Questionnaire design appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>

You can use the Page paradata variable to handle page navigation as an alternative or additional to Next and Back buttons. You control the content that is displayed by setting page breaks and the respondent selects the page by selecting a code in the Page paradata variable.

Enable the Page paradata variable

For surveys created using the latest survey templates, the Page paradata variable is already included in the questionnaire as a hidden system variable.

  1. Select the question and use the mouse right-click to display the pop-up menu
  2. Click Show Variables to show the Page variable

For existing surveys, enable the Page system setting using Questionnaire Properties.

  1. In the Questionnaire window, click on Questionnaire Properties.
  2. In Section, select the Paradata option.
  3. In System Variables, select Page then select Display in questionnaire. This adds a question at the start of the questionnaire. Click OK to save the settings.

The Page paradata variable is a single choice question which you can use to define the number of pages. Questions are automatically assigned to a page based on the page breaks. You can choose how to display the Page paradata variable using the ‘Show’ menu option. When a respondent selects a code in the Page question the questions assigned to that page will show. 

When there are a large number of pages to be displayed on a small screen, such as a smartphone, the Page question can be shown, for example, as a drop down. Where you have larger screens, it can be useful to show as a Tab control 

You can use different show options for each edition of the questionnaire. 

The Page paradata variable is only available in online editions and will show as unavailable in a paper edition.

Using show as tab control with the Page paradata

A tabbed view of your questionnaire allows you to group together questions on the same page and enables your respondents to navigate quickly from one tab to another without the need to go through the pages one by one. This is especially useful where different respondents complete sections of the same questionnaire, or where a respondent needs to move between sections such as in a conference questionnaire.

Set the Page paradata variable to display in the questionnaire prior to setting it to show as a tab control. The codes in the Page paradata variable question will define the number of tabs and the tab names when shown as a tab control. Questions are automatically assigned to a tab based on the page breaks. 

Add the tabs

The new Page question created is a single choice question, where each choice will define a tab. The code label will be used as the name of the tab.

The tab control is only available in online editions. In a paper edition, the Page system setting is shown as unavailable.

Add an entry for each tab that you want on the tab control. Enter the first tab name in the first answer choice, labelled “Code Label”, then press Tab to create and move to the next code label. 

We recommend displaying the question text above the tabs although you can hide the question text, by selecting Show and Text, then clearing the Show checkbox.

Add the Page Breaks for each tab

When you have entered the tab names, use page breaks to group the questions that appear on each tab. 

The questions between the Page question and the first page break will appear on the first tab, the questions between the first and second page break will appear on the second tab. Repeat this until you have created page breaks for all the tabs. 

To add a page break above the selected question, select the Break option in the Toolbar Topics list then select or clear the Page Break checkbox.

Topics toolbar showing page break settings

Show as a Tab Control

  1. Select the Page question.
  2. Select Show in the toolbar topic list.
  3. Select As Tab Control in the next list and select Show.
  1. Repeat this for each online edition that you want to show a tabbed page.

The Page question will not change appearance in the Questionnaire design window.

Using the tabs in an interview

You can select the tab to show the questions for that page or use the Next and Back buttons to move between tabs. You can go to any tab and you do not need to complete the questions in the tab order shown. The Next and Back buttons can be removed so navigation is only possible with the tabs.

If there are a large number of tabs, or you are using a smaller display, such as a smartphone, the tabs will wrap around to form multiple rows of tabs that you can select.

Page randomisation of groups of questions is not available on tab controls.

Editing a tab

You can edit a tab by

  • Changing the code label in the Page question to update the tab name
  • Changing the position of the page breaks to include different questions on a tab

Removing a tab

Deleting a code label from the Page question removes the tab.

This does not remove the questions associated with that tab. You will need to remove the questions separately or reposition the page breaks, depending on your survey design. 

Removing the tabbed page

If you wish to stop using a tabbed page, you need to hide the Page system setting.

  1. Click on Questionnaire Properties.
  2. In Section, select the Paradata option.
  3. In System Variables, select Page then clear Display in questionnaire.

You may wish to reposition your page breaks, depending on your survey design.

The post Using the Page paradata variable for a Tabbed Questionnaire design appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using logos for Retina and high density devices https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-logos-for-retina-and-high-density-devices/ Mon, 17 Jun 2024 16:30:10 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=12025 What is a high density screen? Over the past few years, computer, smartphone and now TV screens have more than doubled in pixel resolution. This means the individual pixels that make up the screen have become so tiny they are virtually imperceptible to the human eye at a typical viewing distance. Apple first named these […]

The post Using logos for Retina and high density devices appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
What is a high density screen?

Over the past few years, computer, smartphone and now TV screens have more than doubled in pixel resolution. This means the individual pixels that make up the screen have become so tiny they are virtually imperceptible to the human eye at a typical viewing distance. Apple first named these high resolution screens Retina displays, though the generic industry-wide names are HDPI (high dots per inch), high density, and more recently 4K or UHD though these are usually just TVs.

Diagram showing higher pixel density on modern devices compared to traditional standard definition desktop displays.

In this guide we’re focusing on smartphones as these are the most common high density devices.

Logos on high density screens

Due to high density screens having such tiny pixels, logos created for traditional low density screens would be displayed much too small on modern devices. To correct this, high density devices typically double the size of these images to make them look the same physical size as seen on low density screens. Unfortunately, the result of this re-sizing is images that appear blocky or blurry on high density screens.

Diagram showing the effects of standard definition and high definition logos on HDPI displays.

But there is a solution…

Creating images for both low and high density screens

If you want your company or brand logo to look its best on both low and high density screens, use an image that is double the pixel resolution required on a standard low density display, then set the dimensions to 50%. This way it will look its best on both low density desktop screens, as well as modern high density screens like smartphones and tablets.

Using high density logos in Snap XMP

For this worksheet, our example survey logo on a standard definition screen is a 300px wide image, but we want it to look sharp on high density devices.

  1. First, obtain or create a 600px wide version of the normal 300px logo. Your graphics or branding department may need to help out.
  1. Using Insert › Image, choose the 600px logo to insert into the survey.
  1. Using the Zoom input, change the value to 50%.
  1. Click OK to insert the image.

Note: The logo may look a little blocky at this point. Don’t worry, that’s just how Snap XMP Desktop previews scaled images to prevent slowing down your computer.

Publish your survey to test on various device screens. It should look good on low density screens and sharp on high density devices.

Dos and Don’ts

  • Do create high-resolution logos and graphics from original artwork files. Your branding, graphic design or marketing department may need to help out.
  • Do consider the maximum width of your logo or graphic on the smallest devices. We recommend high definition logos being no larger than 600 pixels wide.
  • Don’t use this method with photos as this could cause surveys to load slowly on poorer internet and data connections. Only create high definition logos, icons or diagrams.

The post Using logos for Retina and high density devices appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Importing your translated file https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/importing-your-translated-file/ Wed, 22 May 2024 08:20:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11891 When you receive your translated text file, check it to ensure that it matches the format of the exported file. If you are content, you can then use it to translate your survey.

The post Importing your translated file appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
When you receive your translated text file, check it to ensure that it matches the format of the exported file. If you are content, you can then use it to translate your survey.

  1. Open your survey in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png .
  2. Select File|Translation. The translation wizard opens. Select Apply External Translation from the Action list.
  3. Click Next>. The translation wizard import dialog appears.
  4. Select the language in the survey that you are translating from. You would normally use the text file that you previously exported as the Reference Language file.
  5. Specify the language that you are translating to as the Translation Language. Select the file that you have received from your translator as the File name.
  6. Check the Complete variables only box if you wish only to use translations of complete questions.
  7. Uncheck the box if you want to translate partial questions where the automatic translator finds matching strings or words (for example, Yes and No).
  8. Check the Overwrite existing content box if you wish to overwrite any translated text which is already present in your survey. Clear the box if you want to preserve any existing translated text.
  9. Click Start.
  10. When the translation has finished, a translation report is displayed. You can save this to a file or print it by clicking the Send To… button.
  11. Inspect the translated version of your survey. Questions or parts of questions which have not been translated will display the original language in grey.

The post Importing your translated file appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Exporting the source file for translation https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/exporting-the-source-file-for-translation/ Wed, 22 May 2024 08:19:10 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11889 These instructions show how to create the translation file containing the text that you need translating. Preparing external translation Setting the export languages Setting the export options

The post Exporting the source file for translation appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
These instructions show how to create the translation file containing the text that you need translating.

Preparing external translation

  1. Open your survey in Design mode
  2. Select File|Translation to open the translation wizard.
  3. Select Prepare External Translation from the Action drop down list.
  4. Click Next.

Setting the export languages

Using the Translation wizard to export a language for translation
  1. If you already have translated some of the questions, export to a Reference with a matched translation. This creates two files, one with the list of text to be translated, and one with the list of texts that have been translated with gaps for untranslated text. If you do not have an existing translation, you can create a Reference file only.
  2. Specify the Reference Language (the language that you will translate from) and the name of the file where the list of texts will be saved. By default, the file name is the survey filename with a TXT suffix.
  3. If you are creating a matched translation, specify the Translation Language (the language that your text will be translated into) and the name of the file where the list of existing translation texts will be saved. Ensure that this is a different file name to the reference language file name.

Setting the export options

  1. Select the Omit repeated content box to limit the number of texts in the translation file. This omits duplicates of complete questions, instructions and labels (such as “Other”).
  2. Clear the Omit undefined translations, if available. Use this when you are exporting a translated survey for use in translating other surveys.
  3. Select the Omit defined translations if you are creating a single file. This leaves out already translated phrases. If you are not sure about your existing translations, clear this box to translate all the survey text.
  4. Click Start to start the export. When the export completes, you will see a translation report. You can save this to a file or print it by clicking the Send To button.

The post Exporting the source file for translation appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Translation wizard https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/translation-wizard/ Tue, 21 May 2024 16:38:57 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11884 The translation wizard helps you to create multi-lingual surveys. You can export text from the questionnaire for translation. When the translation is available, you can import the file containing the translated text to the survey. If you have a translated file, you can import it into any survey that contains the original text. You can also use a SurveyPak as […]

The post Translation wizard appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The translation wizard helps you to create multi-lingual surveys. You can export text from the questionnaire for translation. When the translation is available, you can import the file containing the translated text to the survey. If you have a translated file, you can import it into any survey that contains the original text.

You can also use a SurveyPak as a source for your translations, so that a survey can include any translation text in the SurveyPak.

Prepare External TranslationCreate a file containing the pieces of text from the survey that you wish to translate.
Apply External TranslationImport translations from files in the correct format. This can be from a matched file export from another survey, or by a translation service working on a previously exported file.
Translate From ReferenceUse an open SurveyPak as a source for translation. If the same question exists in the SurveyPak and has been translated, you can import the translation from the SurveyPak.

The post Translation wizard appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Editions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/editions/ Thu, 09 May 2024 12:19:34 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11847 The Editions and Style Templates dialog contains information about the different editions in the questionnaire. Edition list Check the box by an edition to include it when you publish your questionnaire, uncheck the box to remove it. New Create a new output edition. Questionnaire has same structure and text but different properties Language Open the […]

The post Editions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Editions and Style Templates dialog contains information about the different editions in the questionnaire.

Editions and Style Templates
Edition listCheck the box by an edition to include it when you publish your questionnaire, uncheck the box to remove it.
NewCreate a new output edition. Questionnaire has same structure and text but different properties
LanguageOpen the languages dialog to create a new language edition (one per output edition). Questionnaire can have different text but same structure and properties
DeleteDelete selected edition. This is only available if survey has never been published.
RenameChange the name of the selected edition (you cannot change the language tag)
LoadLoad one of the style templates (.qsf file) supplied with Snap according to which boxes are checked
SaveSave the current questionnaire styles to a template file.
CopyCopy the current styles to the Clipboard. This is often used to transfer styles between surveys.
PastePaste styles from the Clipboard.
Page setupCheck to use portrait/landscape, page size etc
ColoursCheck to load the colours of questions/backgrounds and images
LayoutLoad the question styles and the layout (number of columns and width of margins etc.)

Adding an edition

  1. With the Questionnaire window open, click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog box.
  2. The dialog will display any editions of the questionnaire that currently exist.
  3. Select New from the Edition area of the screen. A New Survey Edition dialog box will display.
Creating a new edition
  1. Enter an edition name to appear on the edition tab that identifies this edition. You must choose a name that is unique in the questionnaire.
  2. Select the publication medium details from the drop-down list. The choices are Snap OnlinePaper and Scanning.
  3. Select which current edition to copy styles from, or select a template to load styles from.
  4. Click OK.
  5. The editions list shows the new edition of the questionnaire.
  6. Click OK to return to the Questionnaire window.
  7. You can toggle between the various editions by
    • clicking on the tabs at the bottom of the screen
    • using Alt +PageUp and Alt +PageDown to switch between the tabs
Tabs used to switch to a different edition
  1. If you have multiple languages in your questionnaire, the new edition will include a tab for each language.

Deleting an edition

  1. You can only delete editions from unpublished questionnaires. You cannot remove any editions after publishing the questionnaire.
  2. Open the Questionnaire window.
  3. Click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
  4. Select the edition you wish to delete and click Delete.
  5. This displays a message to confirm that you want to delete. Click Yes.
  6. Click OK to return to the questionnaire.

Hiding an edition

You can always hide editions. Hidden editions are not visible in the Questionnaire window and they are not part of the published questionnaire.

  1. Click EditionsIcon.png in the Questionnaire window to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
  2. Displayed editions have a check mark in the box next to them. To hide an edition, uncheck the box.
  3. Click OK to return to the questionnaire. The hidden edition(s) will no longer be in the edition tabs at the bottom of the pane.

Renaming an edition

  1. Open the Questionnaire window.
  2. Click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
  3. Select the edition you wish to rename and click Rename.
  4. The Format Name dialog opens displaying the current name. Change the name to the one you require and click OK.
  5. Click OK to return to the questionnaire.

The post Editions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Context menus https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/context-menus/ Wed, 24 Apr 2024 14:17:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11780 Clicking the right mouse button in the Questionnaire window displays a context menu; a menu of commands that are relevant to your current position and selection. All the commands on it can be accessed in other ways, but this may be a faster way of finding them. The menu that appears will vary depending on the current mode […]

The post Context menus appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Clicking the right mouse button in the Questionnaire window displays a context menu; a menu of commands that are relevant to your current position and selection. All the commands on it can be accessed in other ways, but this may be a faster way of finding them.

The menu that appears will vary depending on the current mode (DesignStyle or Data View) and on what is selected. Each mode has its own standard menu that will appear in most cases, but in two of the modes (Design and Style) a shortened version will appear if one or more entire questions are highlighted.

Styles menu

Menu ItemDescription
StylesOpens the Style Picker (in Design mode) or Style Organiser (in Style mode).
Style ModeSwitches to Style mode.
Design ModeSwitches to Design mode.
Data ViewSwitches to Data View mode.

Edit menu

Menu ItemDescription
EditOpens a sub-menu choice of CutCopyPaste or Delete.
CutCuts the current selection to the clipboard.
CopyCopies the current selection to the clipboard.
PastePastes the current selection from the clipboard.
DeleteDeletes the current selection.
Select AllSelects all the questions.

Properties menu

Menu ItemDescription
Variable PropertiesOpens the Variables Properties dialog.
Routing RulesOpens the Routing Rules dialog.
Background ImageOpens the Picture dialog.
Expand all drop downsIn online questionnaires containing one or more drop-down questions, this setting opens or closes the answer lists.
Hide VariablesConceal the selected questions.
ResponseSet the response type for the selected question(s), which can be single, multiple, quantity, literal, date, time or none.
Character FormatOpens a sub-menu choice containing the options Font, BoldItalic or Underline. Font opens the Font dialog, the other options apply that character format.
InsertInsert answers from a previous question, such as, survey fields, images, audio or video files, or links. Opens a sub-menu containing the items ImageVariable FieldResponse Property, Survey FieldHTML Field, Media Field and Page Timer, which open the appropriate dialog.
BreakInsert a Page BreakColumn Break or Section Break.
ToolsOpens a sub-menu containing the items RenumberSpell Check, and Editions Templates, which opens the Editions and Style Templates dialog.

The post Context menus appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Editing buttons and keyboard shortcuts https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/editing-buttons-and-keyboard-shortcuts/ Wed, 24 Apr 2024 10:29:22 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11778 Navigating around the questionnaire Action Commands Move question below Page Down Move question above Page Up Move to the first question Ctrl + Home Move to the last question Ctrl + End Move down a line Down cursor key Move up a line Up cursor key Move one character left or right Left or Right […]

The post Editing buttons and keyboard shortcuts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Navigating around the questionnaire
ActionCommands
Move question belowPage Down
Move question abovePage Up
Move to the first questionCtrl + Home
Move to the last questionCtrl + End
Move down a lineDown Arrow Down cursor key
Move up a lineImage: Up Arrow Up cursor key
Move one character left or rightImage: Left Arrow Left or Image: Right Arrow Right cursor key
Move one word left or rightCtrl + Image: Left Arrow Left cursor key or Ctrl + Image: Right Arrow Right cursor key

Editing questions

ActionCommands
Add a new questionMove the cursor to the required location. Press Enter to create a new question after the current one.
Click New button to insert a new question before the current one.
Alternatively, use the menu option Edit | New or Ctrl + N.
Add a new part of a questionAt the end of a Multi Choice, use Ctrl + Enter to add an Other style question, or to create a Grid Next after a Grid First, or Open Next after Open First.
Delete a questionDelete button will delete the question currently highlighted.
Clone a questionClone button will copy the currently highlighted question and insert it immediately after the current question.
Alternatively, use the menu option Edit | Clone or Ctrl + O.
Move a questionUse CtrlImage: Up Arrow and Down Arrow to move a question up and down within the questionnaire.
Add new codesMove the cursor to the required location in the list of codes and press Tab.
Delete existing codesUse Ctrl + Y to remove the entire code. Alternatively, use the Backspace key or Delete key to remove a character at a time.
Change box sizeUse Ctrl+ + on the numeric keypad to increase the size of the box and Ctrl + to decrease the size of the box for Open Ended questions.

Adding breaks

ActionCommands
Add a new lineMove the cursor to the required place in the text. Use Shift + Enter to force a new line.
Add a page breakHighlight a question and press Ctrl + Shift + B and a  will appear above the current question. Press Ctrl + Shift + B again to remove the page break.
Add a column breakHighlight a question and press Ctrl + Shift + A and a  will appear above the current question. Press Ctrl + Shift + A again to remove the column break.
Add a section breakNo shortcut available.

Selecting questions

ActionCommands
Selecting consecutive questions/ codesEither drag down with the left mouse button depressed, or use Shift + Down Arrow to select the required questions or codes.
Select allUse Ctrl + A to select the whole questionnaire.

Questionnaire actions

ActionCommands
SaveUse File | Save or Ctrl + S to save your work.
PrintUse File | Print Report or Ctrl + P to show the print preview, where you can print the questionnaire.
Undo the last actionUse Edit | Undo or Ctrl + Z
FindUse Edit | Find or Ctrl + F to open the Find dialog.
Use Edit | Find Next or F3 to find the next item.
Use Edit | Find Previous or Shift + F3 to find the previous item.
Spell CheckUse F9 to open the spell checking dialog
Switch to Design mode (from Style or Data View mode)
Switch to Style mode (from Design mode)
Ctrl + M
Switch to Data View modeCtrl + Shift + D
Variable PropertiesAlt + Enter to open the Variable Properties for the selected question.
Open the Style Picker in Design mode
Open the Style Organiser in Style mode
Ctrl + Shift + S
Publish QuestionnaireUse File | Publish or Ctrl + Shift + W to open the Questionnaire properties for publishing
Editions and Style TemplatesUse File | Editions or Ctrl + Shift + E to open the Editions and Style templates dialog.

The post Editing buttons and keyboard shortcuts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Spell checking your questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/spell-checking-your-questionnaire/ Tue, 23 Apr 2024 16:44:20 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11776 Spell checking helps improve the quality of your questionnaire by making sure there are no spelling mistakes in the text for titles, instructions, questions and answers. Spell checking the questionnaire text Spelling options You can set the default settings for spell checking in the Spell Checker Options dialog. Click Options in the Spellings dialog or use the Tailor […]

The post Spell checking your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Spell checking helps improve the quality of your questionnaire by making sure there are no spelling mistakes in the text for titles, instructions, questions and answers.

Spell checking the questionnaire text

  1. With the Questionnaire window open, click SpellCheckIcon.png to start a spell check. The spell check searches the entire questionnaire from the current editing position of the cursor.
  2. When the spell check identifies an incorrect spelling, you will see the word in the Change to field. The Suggestions list shows a list of alternative spellings that you can choose from.
    • Click Ignore to leave a word unaltered.
    • Click Ignore All to skip all occurrences of that word.
    • Select Change to put the text in the Change to: box into the text of the questionnaire.
    • Select Change All to change all occurrences of that word to the new spelling.
Spell checking the questionnaire
  1. At the end of the questionnaire, the spell check automatically restarts at the beginning. The spell check process stops once the entire questionnaire has been checked. It will then display a message showing the number of words checked and replaced.
  2. Click OK to return to the survey.

Spelling options

You can set the default settings for spell checking in the Spell Checker Options dialog. Click Options in the Spellings dialog or use the Tailor | Spelling menu in Snap XMP Desktop to change the spell checker options.

The default setting for spell checking is to ignore both numbers and partial numbers, so that numbers that appear in the questionnaire, such as Q1, Q2A, 100, 1997 are ignored.

The post Spell checking your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Zoom https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/zoom/ Tue, 23 Apr 2024 14:44:16 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11774 The displayed size of the questionnaire can be changed by using the Zoom button  on the Questionnaire toolbar. You can choose to zoom in, with a larger value, to get a more detailed view of questions and graphics in your questionnaire. By choosing a smaller value, you can see an overview of the questionnaire layout, showing more questions at a […]

The post Zoom appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The displayed size of the questionnaire can be changed by using the Zoom button ZoomIcon.png on the Questionnaire toolbar. You can choose to zoom in, with a larger value, to get a more detailed view of questions and graphics in your questionnaire. By choosing a smaller value, you can see an overview of the questionnaire layout, showing more questions at a reduced size.

This only affects the appearance on the screen. It does not alter the look of the questionnaire when printed or viewed online. The Zoom setting resets when you close the Questionnaire window. The questionnaire always opens with zoom set to 100%.

  1. Click the Zoom button ZoomIcon.png on the toolbar and this shows a drop-down list of options, from 25% up to 400%.
  2. Choose a larger value to zoom in to get a close-up view of your questionnaire.
  3. Choose a smaller value to zoom out to make more questions visible but at a reduced size.
  4. Alternatively you can type in any value between 25% and 400% to display the zoom setting you want.

The post Zoom appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Questionnaire toolbar https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/questionnaire-toolbar/ Tue, 23 Apr 2024 14:30:06 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11768 The Questionnaire window allows you to specify the layout and structure of your questionnaire. Button and menu options Button Menu option Alternative Description Switch to Design mode. Ctrl + M Switch to Style mode. Ctrl + Shift + D Switch to Data View mode. Edit | New Ctrl + N Create a new question. The […]

The post Questionnaire toolbar appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Questionnaire window allows you to specify the layout and structure of your questionnaire.

Button and menu options

ButtonMenu optionAlternativeDescription
DesignModeIcon.pngSwitch to Design mode.
StyleModeIcon.pngCtrl + MSwitch to Style mode.
DataModeIcon.pngCtrl + Shift + DSwitch to Data View mode.
NewSurveyIcon.pngEdit | NewCtrl + NCreate a new question. The name of the question must be unique within a survey. Digits and stops are allowed, e.g. Q1, Q1.1, Q1a
CloneSurveyIcon.pngEdit | CloneCtrl + OClone the existing question to create a new question with a different name.
DeleteSurveyIcon.pngEdit | DeleteDeleteDelete the current question.
UndoIcon.pngEdit | UndoCtrl + ZUndo the last action.
RedoIcon.pngEdit | RedoRedo the last action.
SaveIcon.pngFile | SaveSave the questionnaire but keeps the Questionnaire window open. This is only active once you have made changes.
VariablePropsIcon.pngOpens the Variable Properties dialog, where you can change the property values for the selected variable.
StylePickerIcon.pngOpens the Style Picker dialog, where you can select a style to apply to a question.
RoutingIcon.pngOpens the Routing Rules dialog, where you can create routing rules.
RenumberIcon.pngRenumber the questionnaire. Double-click to switch on auto-renumbering. Single-click to return to manual mode.
Questionnaire properties buttonFile | Page SetupQuestionnaire Properties. Options available depend on the edition of the questionnaire.
EditionsIcon.pngFile | EditionsEditions and Style Templates assigns a Format or Language or saves a template of the current questionnaire layout.
PrintPreviewIcon.pngFile |Print ReportCtrl + PProduce a print preview of the questionnaire with the option to print a copy.
SpellCheckIcon.pngEdit | Spell checkF9Spell checks the questionnaire.
ZoomIcon.pngZoom in or out to change the size of the questionnaire on the screen.
Define external questionnaireDefine scanning. This button is only displayed if the scanning module is installed and a scanning questionnaire is being designed.

The post Questionnaire toolbar appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Style Templates https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/style-templates/ Wed, 27 Mar 2024 14:12:29 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11741 You can design a questionnaire using existing styles and then apply a Style Template that represents a particular branding in terms of page set-up, colours and layout. Snap XMP Desktop comes with a number of style templates. These provide a range of alternative layouts and colour schemes. You can also create your own style templates from questionnaires. Loading […]

The post Style Templates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can design a questionnaire using existing styles and then apply a Style Template that represents a particular branding in terms of page set-up, colours and layout.

Snap XMP Desktop comes with a number of style templates. These provide a range of alternative layouts and colour schemes. You can also create your own style templates from questionnaires.

Loading a style template

  1. With the Questionnaire window open, click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
Editions and Style Templates
  1. The three tick box fields relate to Page Setup (portrait/landscape etc.), Colours (the individual colors for the background of the questionnaire and the color of all the fonts used in the text of the question and the code labels) and Layout (the arrangement and format of individual styles of questions). If you select all three options, this loads all parts of the style template.
  2. Click Load in the Style Template area.
  3. Select one of the style template files, with extension QSF, from the list and press Open to load the template in to the questionnaire. This updates the questions using the new style settings. Save the questionnaire to save the new layout/colors as well.

Saving a template

If you make changes to the styles, you can save them as a template for re-use in other surveys.

You can only save named styles (not like styles) which you have saved in the Style Organiser in Style mode.

  1. Click StyleModeIcon.png to change to Style mode.
  2. Click StylePickerIcon.png to display the Style Organiser dialog.
Style Organiser dialog
  1. Convert any new like styles into full styles by clicking the Properties button and renaming the style. Click OK to save the style.
Style Properties dialog
  1. Click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
Editions and Style Templates
  1. Select the Page setup, Colours and Layout boxes to specify which attributes to save in the style template. You will need to check the Layout box to store the new styles.
  2. Click Save.
  3. Enter the file name of the style template. The style template files have the extension QSF. Click Save to save the style template. The new template will now be available to other Snap XMP questionnaires.

The post Style Templates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Adding headers and footers to a paper questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-headers-and-footers-to-a-paper-questionnaire/ Thu, 21 Mar 2024 13:33:06 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11735 You can add additional text and graphics to the header and footer of the first page and, optionally, all subsequent pages.

The post Adding headers and footers to a paper questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can add additional text and graphics to the header and footer of the first page and, optionally, all subsequent pages.

  1. Click QuestionnairePropsIcon.png to display the Questionnaire Properties dialog.
  2. Select the Page section.
  3. Click the Header/Footer button to display a Headers/Footers dialog.
Inserting headers and footers for the questionnaire pages
  1. Check the relevant boxes to specify whether the headers and footers are to appear on the first page and/or subsequent pages.
  2. The header and footer each consist of the three areas (left, centre and right). The header/footer may contain:
    • free format text
    • images
    • variable fields
    • survey fields
    • date and time of printing or publication
  3. To insert a field click Insert and choose from Image, Variable Field, Survey Field or Date/Time Field from the menu. You can also select a Survey Field from the drop-down list in the top left corner in the dialog toolbar.
  4. The contents can be formatted using the format buttons and fields at the top of the dialog to set the font name, size, style and color. The justification is fixed for each area.

The post Adding headers and footers to a paper questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Saving your questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/saving-your-questionnaire-2/ Thu, 21 Mar 2024 10:55:23 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11724 As you create your questionnaire, make sure that you save your questions and other changes regularly. When closing the Questionnaire window by clicking on  in the top right corner of the window, you will be asked if you wish to save the changes to the questionnaire.

The post Saving your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
As you create your questionnaire, make sure that you save your questions and other changes regularly.

  • Click Save SaveIcon.png on the Questionnaire window toolbar to save changes to the questionnaire.
  • You can also select the File|Save menu to save any changes to the questionnaire.

When closing the Questionnaire window by clicking on https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/409.bmp in the top right corner of the window, you will be asked if you wish to save the changes to the questionnaire.

  • Click Yes to save the current changes.
  • Click No to close the Questionnaire window and abandon any changes made.
  • Click Cancel to return to the Questionnaire window.

The post Saving your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Response types https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/response-types/ Thu, 21 Mar 2024 10:54:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11722 You can set the type of response required from the respondent for some of the question styles. No response These styles are used to give information. They provide the title, instructions and notes in your questionnaire. Select a response Respondents can select one or more pre-defined answers. These types of questions are also known as […]

The post Response types appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can set the type of response required from the respondent for some of the question styles.

No response

These styles are used to give information. They provide the title, instructions and notes in your questionnaire.

Select a response

Respondents can select one or more pre-defined answers. These types of questions are also known as closed or coded questions, as the respondent must select one or more question codes as their answer.

They can appear as drop-downs, grids, interactive images, sliders and semantic scales.

Examples can include

  • a single choice question asking what age range the respondent is in
  • a grid of questions asking respondents to rate different aspects of a service

Open response

Respondents can enter responses in their own words, often in a comment box. The data can be free format text, a quantity, date or time. When you need the response to match a specific format, you can use a pattern to define the expected format, for example, a phone number or zip code.

The post Response types appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Assigning a question code to an area https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/assigning-a-question-code-to-an-area/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 17:32:12 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11705 When you assign a code to an area, this creates a link between the area and code so that when the respondent clicks the area this is equivalent to selecting the question code as their response. To make the area inactive, click unassign to remove the assigned code from the selected shape. You can attach […]

The post Assigning a question code to an area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
When you assign a code to an area, this creates a link between the area and code so that when the respondent clicks the area this is equivalent to selecting the question code as their response.

  1. Open the Map Control Editor on the Designer tab.
  2. Select the area(s) to associate with the code. You can select multiple areas using Ctrl + click.
  3. Either right-click and select Assign to Code|variable code or select Shape | Assign to Code | variable code.
  1. When you have associated an area with a code, the code appears below the image when the area is selected.

To make the area inactive, click unassign to remove the assigned code from the selected shape.

You can attach the same image codes to multiple areas. This means when any of the areas is clicked or has the mouse go over it, all the areas associated with that code will appear according to the changes you have applied.

The post Assigning a question code to an area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Copying a format in the Map Control Editor https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/copying-a-format-in-the-map-control-editor/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 17:21:52 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11703 When you have created a format for an area, you can copy it to another area using the Format painter. If you would like to apply the same format to multiple areas, double click the Format painter before you apply it to an area. Click the button again to exit this mode.

The post Copying a format in the Map Control Editor appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
When you have created a format for an area, you can copy it to another area using the Format painter.

  1. Select the area that has the applied format that you want.
  2. Click the Format painter button IM: format painter.
  3. Click the area you would like to apply the format to. The filter, brightness, contrast and pen settings will all be copied to the selected area.

If you would like to apply the same format to multiple areas, double click the Format painter before you apply it to an area. Click the button again to exit this mode.

The post Copying a format in the Map Control Editor appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Change the way an area looks in the Map Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/change-the-way-an-area-looks-in-the-map-control/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 17:18:00 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11676 You can change the way an area looks when it is clicked on. You can add a filter to change the way the image appears, add an outline, and change the contrast or brightness of the area. These are available in the Map Control Editor from the Designer tab toolbar and the Shape menu. Fill […]

The post Change the way an area looks in the Map Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can change the way an area looks when it is clicked on. You can add a filter to change the way the image appears, add an outline, and change the contrast or brightness of the area.

These are available in the Map Control Editor from the Designer tab toolbar and the Shape menu.

Fill IM: Fill button Fill the area with the selected colour.
Color filter IM; colour filter button View the picture through a lens of the selected colour.
Grayscale IM: grayscale button Change the area from colour to grey.
Invert colors Reverse the red, green and blue colour in the area.
Blur IM: blur button Blur the selected area.
Oil painting effect IM: oil painting button Speckle the selected area.
Emboss IM: emboss button Make dark patches indented and light patches raised.
Edge detect Emphasize edges and simplify plain areas.
Clear filters Remove any of the effects above.
Brightness/ Contrast IM: brightness contrast button Increase or decrease the brightness or contrast of the selected area. This may be combined with any of the filters above.
Pen IM: pen button Specify the colour and thickness of the area outline, and whether it is displayed. This may be combined with any of the effects above.

The post Change the way an area looks in the Map Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Editing the clickable area https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/editing-the-clickable-area/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 17:09:11 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11673 You can convert shapes from one type to another. If you have a polygon, you can also add and remove points from the polygon to change its shape. Drawing precisely To draw more accurately use the Zoom tool on the bar to change your view of the picture. Changing the shape type Deleting a shape Moving the […]

The post Editing the clickable area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can convert shapes from one type to another. If you have a polygon, you can also add and remove points from the polygon to change its shape.

Drawing precisely

To draw more accurately use the Zoom tool on the bar to change your view of the picture.

Changing the shape type

  1. Select the area by clicking it.
  2. Right-click the area, click Shape Type and select a new shape from the context menu. You can also select the new type from the Shape|Type sub-menu.

Deleting a shape

  1. Select the area by clicking it.
  2. Right-click the area, click Delete Shape.

Moving the selected area

You can move a selected area by dragging it with the mouse or by moving it with the cursor keys [] [] [] []. To move a pixel at a time, use the [Ctrl] key with the cursor keys.

Rotating a polygon

You can rotate the polygon when it is complete.

Combining shapes

You can assign more than one area to the same image code. This will have the effect of grouping the areas, and all the areas will be highlighted if the respondent clicks or puts their mouse over one of them.

Using layers

You can create complicated shapes by layering shapes on top of one another. Either by using inactive shapes, or by using grouped shapes (several shapes linked to one code). The topmost shapes are always the ones which are used if a respondent clicks on them. You can change which shape is on top by using the Shape|Bring to front or Shape | Send to back  commands.

The post Editing the clickable area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Defining the clickable area https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/defining-the-clickable-area/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 16:56:27 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11668 When you have imported the image, you need to define the areas that you want to associate with the questions codes. You define the clickable areas of the map control in the Designer tab of the Map Control Editor. Set the pen style After loading the map control or image, the default pen style is […]

The post Defining the clickable area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
When you have imported the image, you need to define the areas that you want to associate with the questions codes.

You define the clickable areas of the map control in the Designer tab of the Map Control Editor.

Set the pen style

After loading the map control or image, the default pen style is a 2 pixel wide yellow line.

You can change the pen style, by clicking the Pen icon IM: pen button or selecting Shape | Format | Outline pen. This opens the Edit Outline dialog where you can set the colour and width of the pen style.

Choose the shape

Next, choose the type of shape to draw the outline. You can

  • Click the appropriate toolbar button.
  • Select the shape from the Tools menu.

If you want to draw several areas of the same shape type, double-click the toolbar shape icon. Click a shape icon again to go back to normal mode.

Define the clickable area

If you are drawing a regular shape, click and drag to create it.

If you are drawing a polygon, click at each point of the shape you wish to create before moving to the next point. Right-click to close the polygon. You can rotate the polygon when it is complete.

The post Defining the clickable area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Resize the Map Control for different screen sizes https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/resize-the-map-control-for-different-screen-sizes/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 15:05:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11664 You can resize a map control to make them suitable for smaller or larger screens. In the Map Control Editor, enter a new percentage value in Size or use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the size. The map resizes to the new percentage size. For example, 100% is the default size […]

The post Resize the Map Control for different screen sizes appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can resize a map control to make them suitable for smaller or larger screens.

In the Map Control Editor, enter a new percentage value in Size or use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the size.

The map resizes to the new percentage size. For example, 100% is the default size when the image or map control loads. When the size is set to 50 %, this resizes to 50% of the original size.

Map Control Resize

Click OK to save the map control.

Use Zoom if you want to see the image in more detail without changing the size of the image in the map control.

The post Resize the Map Control for different screen sizes appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Save your Map Control to use again https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/save-your-map-control-to-use-again/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 14:54:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11662 You can save your Map Control so that you can use it in other surveys and other editions.

The post Save your Map Control to use again appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can save your Map Control so that you can use it in other surveys and other editions.

  1. In the Map Control Editor, select File | Save map control
  2. Browse to the folder location where the map control will be saved.
  3. Enter a name to identify the Map Control file.
  4. Click Save to save the map control.

The post Save your Map Control to use again appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Importing a map control image https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/importing-a-map-control-image/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 13:26:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11648 First, you need to load an image into the map control. The image used for the map control can be one of the following: Snap Surveys provides a range of rating scales that you can download and use. Loading an existing Map Control Snap XMP comes with a number of map control files, including numbers, […]

The post Importing a map control image appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
First, you need to load an image into the map control. The image used for the map control can be one of the following:

  • Snap XMP map control
  • image
  • HTML image map

Snap Surveys provides a range of rating scales that you can download and use.

Loading an existing Map Control

Snap XMP comes with a number of map control files, including numbers, stars, smileys, and UK and US maps. Your organisation may also have their own map control files, which have been created using the Map Control Editor.

  1. Double click the Map Control to open the Map Control Editor.
  2. Select File|Load map control.
  3. Browse for the saved map control file, which use the file extension ISF.
  4. Click Open to load the map control, including the image, formatting and default codes.
  5. You can now edit the map control and save it for future use.

Importing an HTML map

If you already have map files that have been created in the HTML format, you can import these, together with the associated image, and then associate the pre-defined areas with variable codes.

  1. Double click the Map Control to open the Map Control Editor.
  2. Select File|Import HTML map.
  3. Browse for the file containing the HTML image map, which use the extensions HTML and HTM.
  4. Click Open to load the HTML image map. If there are multiple maps in the file, the Map Control Editor loads the first one.
  5. You need to edit the map control by assigning codes and defining the areas to change on selection.
  6. You can save this as a Snap XMP map control for future use.

Importing an image

You can create a Map Control using an image with a supported format; jpg, bmp, png or gif.

  1. Double click the Map Control to open the Map Control Editor.
  2. Select File|Import image.
  3. Browse for the image that you wish to use as a basis for your map.
  4. Click Open to load the image.
  5. You need to edit the map control by assigning codes, formatting and defining the areas to change on selection.
  6. You can save this as a Snap XMP map control for future use.

The post Importing a map control image appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Map Control Editor https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/map-control-editor/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 13:25:54 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11639 The Map Control Editor lets you design and preview a Map Control. The Designer tab contains the tools to load and edit a map control or image. The Preview tab lets you test the map control. First, you need to load a map control or an image into the map control. The image used for […]

The post Map Control Editor appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Map Control Editor lets you design and preview a Map Control.

The Designer tab contains the tools to load and edit a map control or image. The Preview tab lets you test the map control.

First, you need to load a map control or an image into the map control. The image used for the map control can be one of the following:

  • Snap XMP map control
  • image
  • HTML image map

After you have loaded the images into the map control, you are able to

The post Map Control Editor appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using a Map Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-a-map-control/ Tue, 19 Mar 2024 11:49:34 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11633 In online questionnaires, you can make the survey more interesting by converting single or multi-response questions to images. The respondents click on one of the images to answer the question. Snap XMP uses Map Controls to add this feature. With a Map Control each image or part of an image represents a choice. When the […]

The post Using a Map Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
In online questionnaires, you can make the survey more interesting by converting single or multi-response questions to images. The respondents click on one of the images to answer the question.

Snap XMP uses Map Controls to add this feature. With a Map Control each image or part of an image represents a choice. When the respondent clicks on one this highlights the image, showing their response.

You can customise the Map Control by

  • defining the areas to click on
  • defining how the areas map to the question codes
  • setting the type of highlighting

Converting a question to a map control

  1. Open the questionnaire in Design mode.
  2. Select the single or multi-response question that you wish to convert.
  3. Select Show in the toolbar topic list.
  1. Select As Map Control in the next list and check the box.
  1. The question layout changes to a grey box with the text “Double-click to define Map Control”
  2. Click the Map control button on the toolbar or double-click the grey block to open the Map Control Editor window to define your clickable picture.

The codes in the selected question will be loaded into the Map Control Editor so you can associate them with defined areas of the image.

Removing a map control

You can remove a map control from a question.

  1. Select your Map Control question.
  2. Select the Show toolbar topic.
  3. Select As Map Control.
  4. Clear the Show box to revert to the original question style.
Show the Map Control as a Single Choice question

The post Using a Map Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Extracting graphics from a Slider Control template https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/extracting-graphics-from-a-slider-control-template/ Mon, 18 Mar 2024 17:21:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11623 If you want to create your own Slider Control but wish to make it look like one of the template Slider Controls, you can extract the graphics from the template.

The post Extracting graphics from a Slider Control template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
If you want to create your own Slider Control but wish to make it look like one of the template Slider Controls, you can extract the graphics from the template.

  1. Open the Slider Control wizard. This displays the available Slider Control templates. If the one you want is not visible, press the Browse button to find the folder containing it.
Slider Control wizard
  1. Select the Slider Control template with graphics that you wish to use.
  2. Click Extract. A Browse for Folder dialog appears.
  3. Select the folder where you wish to save the graphics, or create a new folder and click OK.
  4. This displays a message box showing whether extraction was successful. You will see the extracted graphic files.

The post Extracting graphics from a Slider Control template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Slider Control for quantity questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/slider-control-for-quantity-questions/ Mon, 18 Mar 2024 17:20:23 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11621 You can convert a quantity question to a Slider Control. Respondents can drag the slider along the bar to show a given quantity. The Slider Controls for quantity questions are very similar to those used for single-response questions, but they do not have the associated graphics for each code point. Instead, you need to supply […]

The post Slider Control for quantity questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can convert a quantity question to a Slider Control. Respondents can drag the slider along the bar to show a given quantity.

The Slider Controls for quantity questions are very similar to those used for single-response questions, but they do not have the associated graphics for each code point. Instead, you need to supply a range of values for the quantity. You can either display a code box so that respondents can type in a numeric value, or display the draggable Slider Control.

Using a template Slider Control

  1. In the Questionnaire window, select the quantity question that you wish to turn into a Slider Control.
  2. Select Show in the toolbar topics, then select As Slider Control in the drop-down list, and check the Show box. The Questionnaire window changes to display a grey box for the question. If a Slider Control has been previously defined for this question the selected Slider Control is displayed.
  3. Double-click the Slider Control area to open the Slider Control wizard. The existing slider bar templates will be displayed. The default templates show five code positions.
  4. Select the one with the bar you wish to use. It will appear in preview, allowing you to move the slider to see how it displays at different settings.

The associated code graphics shown in the template window do not appear for quantity questions. They are only available for coded questions. Instead, you have a code box for respondents to enter their value.

If you wish to change the code box visibility and location:

  1. Select Advanced.
  2. Click Next until you get to the Code labels/ response box page.
  3. Change Size to the required size of the code box (the proportion of space the box uses)
  4. Change Horizontal space to change the distance from the left edge that the response box appears.
Settings for a quantity slider control
  1. Click Finish.

Creating a new Slider Control

  1. In the Questionnaire window, select the quantity question that you wish to turn into a Slider Control.
  2. Select Show in the toolbar topics, then select As Slider Control in the drop-down list, and check the Show box. The Questionnaire window changes to display a grey box for the question. If a Slider Control has been previously defined for this question the selected Slider Control is displayed.
  3. Double click the grey area to open the Slider Control wizard. The existing Slider Control templates will be displayed. The default templates show five code positions, but this will be changed to fit the number of codes that exist in your question.
  4. Click Advanced without selecting a template. You are taken to the Bar section.
  5. Click Browse to find an image to use as the bar for your Slider Control.
Setting the bar properties for a quantity slider control
  1. If the image is greyscale, you can change the color by using the Colourize button.
  2. Click Next to go to the scale marker page. These mark divisions on the bar. You can ignore these for a quantity slider.
  3. Click Next to choose an image to use for the slider that respondents drag or stretch across the bar.
  4. Click Next to set how the Slider Control behaves. Clear the Use steps box so the respondent can position the slider wherever they like on the bar.
Setting the scale properties for a quantity slider control
  1. Click Next to set the maximum and minimum values respondents can enter. You can also set the position of the code box to type in a response and the direction the slider travels in.
Settings for a quantity slider control
  1. When you have made all the changes, click Finish. You have the options to save your Slider Control as a template. Slider Control tempate files have the SLD extension and contain all the images to create the Slider Control.

The post Slider Control for quantity questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Slider Control for single-response questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/slider-control-for-single-response-questions/ Mon, 18 Mar 2024 17:19:30 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11619 You can use a Slider Control with single response questions. Respondents drag the slider to the position representing their response. Using a Slider Control template Creating a new Slider Control Changing the number of points If you have created a question with a Slider Control and then realise that you need to add more points […]

The post Slider Control for single-response questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can use a Slider Control with single response questions. Respondents drag the slider to the position representing their response.

Using a Slider Control template

  1. In the Questionnaire window, select the single response question that you wish to turn into a Slider Control.
  2. Select Show in the toolbar topics, then select As Slider Control in the drop-down list, and check the Show box. The question changes to a grey box for the question. If a Slider Control has been previously defined for this question, that Slider Control is shown.
  3. Double-click the Slider Control area to open the Slider Control wizard. This shows the available Slider Control templates. The default templates have five code positions, but change to fit the number of codes in your question.
Slider Control wizard
  1. Select the one you wish to use. It will appear in preview, allowing you to move the slider to show how the template looks at different settings.
Previewing the slider control
  1. When you have the Slider Control you want, click OK.

Creating a new Slider Control

  1. In the questionnaire window, select the single-response question that you wish to turn into a Slider Control.
  2. Select Show in the toolbar topics, then select As Slider Control in the drop-down list, and check the Show box. The questionnaire window changes to display a grey area for the question.
  3. Double-click the Slider Control area to open the Slider Control wizard. This displays the existing Slider Control templates.
Slider Control wizard
  1. Click Advanced without selecting a template. This displays the Points on slider page. This is where you can choose an image to go with each point on your Slider Control.
Set the point labels using the Slider Control wizard
  1. Click the Browse button to browse for an image for that point. If the image is greyscale, you can change its colour by using the colourize button.
Insert slider image
  1. Repeat this for each point.
Setting the images for a slider control
  1. Click Next to choose an image for the bar. You can specify the position of the bar image.
Setting the bar properties for a slider control
  1. Click Next to choose an image to use as a scale marker between codes.
  2. Click Next to choose an image to use for the slider that respondents drag or stretch across the bar.
  3. Click Next to set how the slider behaves. Select the Use steps box if you want the slider to jump between points, clear it if you want the respondent to be able to position it anywhere on the slider.
Setting the scale properties for a slider control
  1. Click Next to set how the point graphics behave. This step allows you to change which direction the slider travels in, and where the graphics appear.
Settings for a slider control
  1. When you have the slider you want, click Finish. This asks if you wish to save your Slider Control as a style. The file is saved with the .sld extension and contains all the images to create the Slider Control.

Changing the number of points

If you have created a question with a Slider Control and then realise that you need to add more points to it, you must do this.

  1. Select the question in the Questionnaire window.
  2. Click StyleModeIcon.png on the toolbar to change to Style mode.
  3. Click the Slider Control button on the toolbar to open the Slider Control wizard.
  4. Click the Advanced button on the Slider Control wizard. There will be extra SBW: add point and SBW: Remove point buttons, allowing you to add and remove codes in the slider style.
Slider Control wizard

The post Slider Control for single-response questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Changing the Map Control variable codes https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/map-control-editor-variable-codes/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:58:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11444 You can change the labels for question codes or add extra codes to a question from the Map Control Editor. Note that these changes are made to the question as well as the Map Control. Changing the variable codes Setting the codes to match the Map Control defaults If you click the Defaults button, all the response […]

The post Changing the Map Control variable codes appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can change the labels for question codes or add extra codes to a question from the Map Control Editor. Note that these changes are made to the question as well as the Map Control.

Changing the variable codes

  1. Click the Variable codes VariablesIcon.png button on the Map Control Editor toolbar to open the Variable codes dialog.
  2. Click Add to add a new response code to your question.
  3. Type the new code label in the Codes field.
  4. Double-click in a field to edit the code label. The triangle changes to a pen when you are in edit mode. Changes made here will affect the variable properties of the map control question.
  5. Click OK to save your changes.

Setting the codes to match the Map Control defaults

If you click the Defaults button, all the response codes are set to the defaults code labels for the Map Control. For example, if you have a geographical map, the defaults might be geographical regions. If you do this by mistake, click Cancel to discard your changes.

The post Changing the Map Control variable codes appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Map Control Editor options https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/map-control-editor-options/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:57:57 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11441 You can decide for the whole map control whether areas change when a respondent clicks on them or whether they change when the mouse/cursor is over them.

The post Map Control Editor options appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can decide for the whole map control whether areas change when a respondent clicks on them or whether they change when the mouse/cursor is over them.

  1. Select Tools|Options in the Map Control Editor. The Options dialog appears.
  2. Set the required options.
    • Show shapes on hover displays the changed areas when the mouse pointer is over them.
    • Show code labels on hover displays the variable code label when the mouse pointer is above the associated area.
    • Select Highlight codes in scale displays all codes up to the one you have selected. For example, if you have a five-star map, checking the third star will highlight the first three stars.
    • Reverse scale reverses the highlight order, so if you have a five-star map, checking the third star will highlight the last three stars.
  3. Click OK to apply the changes to the map control.

The post Map Control Editor options appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Rotating a polygon shape https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/map-control-editor-rotate-dialog/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:57:40 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11438 Open the Map Control Editor rotate dialog by right-clicking a polygonal shape and selecting Rotate from the context menu. Right Rotate the selected shape right (clockwise) Left Rotate the selected shape left (anti-clockwise) Degrees Select the number of degrees to rotate. Select 90, 180 or 270 degree rotation or select Free and enter the number of degrees […]

The post Rotating a polygon shape appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Open the Map Control Editor rotate dialog by right-clicking a polygonal shape and selecting Rotate from the context menu.

RightRotate the selected shape right (clockwise)
LeftRotate the selected shape left (anti-clockwise)
DegreesSelect the number of degrees to rotate.
Select 90, 180 or 270 degree rotation or select Free and enter the number of degrees to rotate by.

The post Rotating a polygon shape appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Style properties https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/style-properties/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:51:36 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11397 In Style mode  , clicking the Style Properties button  opens the Style Properties dialog for the currently selected style. Name This is the name of the question style. Based On The name of the style that is the basis for the question style. Next Object The question style that is automatically created after the current question. Next […]

The post Style properties appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
In Style mode StyleModeIcon.png , clicking the Style Properties button VariablePropsIcon.png opens the Style Properties dialog for the currently selected style.

Renaming a style template in the Style Properties dialog
NameThis is the name of the question style.
Based OnThe name of the style that is the basis for the question style.
Next ObjectThe question style that is automatically created after the current question.
Next PartThe part of a question that is created once the current part is completed. This applies to Grid First and Grid Next, Open First and Open Next, and Multi Choice.
PreviousThe type of question to be created immediately before this question.

Use the Scroll down arrow button to change any of the settings in terms of Next Object, Next Part or Previous. Any changes you make to individual style properties remain with that style for the current survey. The changes are not available to other surveys created with Snap XMP.

To alter any of the settings in the copy fields, ensure that you select the appropriate Clone Next Object, Clone Next Part or Clone Previous. This highlights the selected elements of the question. Then you can use the cursor or the space bar to identify which element you want to copy.

The post Style properties appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Renaming a style https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/renaming-a-style/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:51:16 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11395 If you make changes to elements within an individual question and are working within Design mode  , the new changes will be saved as a new style called (like Grid First). If you have several questions that will be using the same layout as the (like Grid First) one, then you could choose to rename the style.

The post Renaming a style appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
If you make changes to elements within an individual question and are working within Design mode DesignModeIcon.png , the new changes will be saved as a new style called (like Grid First). If you have several questions that will be using the same layout as the (like Grid First) one, then you could choose to rename the style.

  1. To rename any of your own styles, switch to Style mode StyleModeIcon.png
  2. Select one of the questions using the style that you want to rename.
Selecting a question in Style mode
  1. Select the Style Properties button VariablePropsIcon.png
  2. Click in the Name box at the top of the Style Properties dialog box.
  3. Type in a new name and click on OK to save the style name within the current survey.
Renaming a style template in the Style Properties dialog

The post Renaming a style appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using the Style Organiser https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-the-style-organiser/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:50:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11393 The Style Organiser tool allows you to view the styles you have used within the questionnaire. Style Organiser is only available in Style mode  and can be used to sort styles, as well as rename and make copies of styles. Other views of styles are also available in the organiser. Click  to display the Style Organiser dialog. Viewing styles Select All Variables to […]

The post Using the Style Organiser appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Style Organiser tool allows you to view the styles you have used within the questionnaire. Style Organiser is only available in Style mode StyleModeIcon.png and can be used to sort styles, as well as rename and make copies of styles. Other views of styles are also available in the organiser.

Click StylePickerIcon.png to display the Style Organiser dialog.

Style Organiser dialog

Viewing styles

  • Select the type of styles you would like to view in the preview window from the Styles drop-down list.

Select All Variables to display all the questions in the current questionnaire in a list. This can be useful if you are not familiar with style names.

  • Check the Fit to Window box to fit the question inside the preview window. This is especially useful when previewing titles and subtitles, which normally fit across the width of the whole page.
  • The Sorting option orders the styles in the style list. There are three choices:
    • By Name lists the styles in alphabetical order.
    • Recently Used First lists the styles in most recently used order.
    • By family lists the styles in the family they belong to. The list shows style families in alphabetical order.

Creating new styles

Create a new style based on an existing style by clicking the New button. This copies the attributes of the style and allows you to give it a new name.

Managing temporary styles

Snap XMP Desktop creates temporary styles if you edit a question within questionnaire design.

  1. You can convert these temporary styles into full re-usable styles by clicking the Properties button and renaming the style. Click OK to save the style.
Style Properties dialog
  1. You can also use a temporary style to overwrite the style it was based on, or set it back to being the base style. Click the Re-assign button to display the Extended Style Assignment dialog. The available choices depend on the selection.
    • Make the style “base style” look like variable changes the base style so it matches the selected style
    • Make all “base style” variables look like variable changes all the variables which have the same style base as the selected one look like the selected one.
    • Assign the style “base style” to variable is re-applies the original style to the variable.
Extended Style Assignment dialog

Displaying style information

Click the Properties button to display the Style Properties dialog box. You can make changes to style names, or edit parts of the question. You cannot edit the names of the styles supplied with Snap XMP.

Deleting styles

When you Delete a style any questions in that style return to the appropriate base style. You cannot delete the base styles supplied with Snap.

Renaming a style

If you make changes to elements within an individual question and are working within Design mode DesignModeIcon.png , the new changes will be saved as a new style called (like Grid First). If you have several questions that will be using the same layout as the (like Grid First) one, then you could choose to rename the style.

  1. To rename any of your own styles, switch to Style mode StyleModeIcon.png
  2. Select one of the questions using the style that you want to rename.
Selecting a question in Style mode
  1. Select the Style Properties button VariablePropsIcon.png
  2. Click in the Name box at the top of the Style Properties dialog box.
  3. Type in a new name and click on OK to save the style name within the current survey.
Renaming a style template in the Style Properties dialog

The post Using the Style Organiser appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using the Style Picker https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-the-style-picker/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:49:35 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11391 The Style Picker tool is an easy way of applying a question style to questions in your questionnaire. This tool is only available in Design mode  . Style Picker allows you to format a question by selecting a style of your choice and viewing this style in the preview window before applying it to the questionnaire. This window shows you how the […]

The post Using the Style Picker appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Style Picker tool is an easy way of applying a question style to questions in your questionnaire. This tool is only available in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png . Style Picker allows you to format a question by selecting a style of your choice and viewing this style in the preview window before applying it to the questionnaire. This window shows you how the question will look in the questionnaire with the selected style applied. It is a useful and easy tool to use as it allows you to try out different question styles and see how they would look in a preview window without actually applying it to a question in the questionnaire.

  1. Select the question you would like to change.
  2. Select More Styles from the drop-down list of style names, or click the Style Picker button StylePickerIcon.png .
  3. The Style Picker dialog appears with the selected question displayed in the preview pane. You can see a list of all of the styles in the questionnaire on the left of the dialog box. To show the question with a different style, select a new style in the list. The preview will change accordingly.
Style Picker dialog
  1. Showing ‘All Variables’ displays all the questions from the current questionnaire with their associated style name in a list. This can be useful if you are not really familiar with style names as it allows you to pick styles by variable rather than by style name.
  2. This updates the question showing the new style in the Questionnaire Window.

Style Picker options

StylesSelect the styles option from drop-down list
All Styles displays all styles, including temporary styles starting with “Like” which have not been saved.
Named Styles displays all named and saved styles.
Used Styles displays all styles used in the questionnaire.
Unused Styles displays all styles not used in the questionnaire.
All Variables lists all variables and their associated style.
PreviewAs the selected question will appear in the selected style.
Fit to windowSelect to fit the preview in the preview window. Clear to display preview at full size.
SortingSelect the order of the styles list: in alphabetical order by name, in order of use, or grouped together in style families (so styles based on another style will appear by it)
OKApply chosen style to the selected variable or question.

The post Using the Style Picker appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Slider Control summary https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/slider-control-summary/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:41:40 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11388 The Summary displays a brief report of the options you chose for the Slider Control. Click the Finish button to create or update the Slider Control. If you want to change anything, click the Back button until you reach the relevant page.

The post Slider Control summary appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Summary displays a brief report of the options you chose for the Slider Control.

Click the Finish button to create or update the Slider Control.

If you want to change anything, click the Back button until you reach the relevant page.

The post Slider Control summary appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Set the code labels and response box in the Slider Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/set-the-code-labels-and-response-box-in-the-slider-control/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:41:20 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11385 You can specify whether to show the code label text or the Slider Control point image in single-response questions. Choose whether the response box is shown when using quantity questions. You can also define the size of the display area and the appearance of code labels or point images. Show code labels/ images Show response […]

The post Set the code labels and response box in the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can specify whether to show the code label text or the Slider Control point image in single-response questions. Choose whether the response box is shown when using quantity questions. You can also define the size of the display area and the appearance of code labels or point images.

Show code labels/ images
Show response box
Select to show the specified items
Slider directionSelect whether the code labels start with the lowest number code on the right or left (or at the top or bottom) For quantity responses specify which way the slider moves to increase or decrease the response
PositionWhether the code labels/response box are to the left or right of the slider
Size% share the code labels/response box has of the space allocated to the slider control
Horizontal spaceSpecify the width of the space around the code labels/response box
Vertical spaceSpecify the height of the space around the code labels/response box
AlignmentSpecify the text/box alignment
MinimumSpecify the minimum value for a quantity response
MaximumSpecify the maximum value for a quantity response
Decimal placesSpecify the decimal places used when specifying quantity scale points

The post Set the code labels and response box in the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Set the scale properties in the Slider Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/set-the-scale-properties-in-the-slider-control/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:41:03 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11382 Specify whether the respondent can choose any position on the Slider Control, or whether the slider moves in discrete steps. You can also specify how the scale is positioned relative to the bar image. Use steps Check to move the slider in code point jumps, clear to allow the respondent to put the slider anywhere […]

The post Set the scale properties in the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Specify whether the respondent can choose any position on the Slider Control, or whether the slider moves in discrete steps. You can also specify how the scale is positioned relative to the bar image.

Use stepsCheck to move the slider in code point jumps, clear to allow the respondent to put the slider anywhere on the bar.
Number of pointsSet the number of points on the scale available to a quantity slider (only available if using steps). Displays the number of codes for a single-response question.
Base offsetSet the start position for a stretchable slider. You would use this for a fill image, if you wished to start the fill at a specific point on the bar image – eg, for a glass to fill above the base.
Left/Top offsetPosition the end of the scale relative to the image.
For a stretched slider, left defaults to 1, top defaults to the bar image height.
Right/Bottom offsetPosition the other end of the scale relative to the image.
For a stretched slider, right defaults to the bar image width, bottom defaults to 1.
Default slider positionSpecify where the slider starts on the bar.

The post Set the scale properties in the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Add bar slider to the Slider Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/add-bar-slider-to-the-slider-control/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:40:45 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11379 Select an image to use as the slider to position the respondent’s choice. Browse Select the image file used for the slider Colourize Choose a color to tint a grayscale image Horizontal offset Move the image left and right from the centre position. Negative values move left, positive values move right. Vertical offset Move the […]

The post Add bar slider to the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Select an image to use as the slider to position the respondent’s choice.

BrowseSelect the image file used for the slider
ColourizeChoose a color to tint a grayscale image
Horizontal offsetMove the image left and right from the centre position. Negative values move left, positive values move right.
Vertical offsetMove the image up and down from the baseline. Negative values move up, positive values move down.
Alt textSpecify the text that is displayed if images are not available or is read out by an audio browser.
MoveMove the slider image along the bar
StretchStretch the slider image along the bar. You would use this if you were filling a bar image.

The post Add bar slider to the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Add bar scale markers to the Slider Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/add-bar-scale-markers-to-the-slider-control/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:40:28 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11376 Specify the marks used on the bar and the starting position for the first mark. Subsequent marks will be placed according to the number of points in the question. Browse Select the image used for the markers Top/Left offset Specify how close the start of the scale is to the start of the bar image […]

The post Add bar scale markers to the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Specify the marks used on the bar and the starting position for the first mark. Subsequent marks will be placed according to the number of points in the question.

BrowseSelect the image used for the markers
Top/Left offsetSpecify how close the start of the scale is to the start of the bar image
Bottom/Right offsetSpecify how close the end of the scale is to the end of the bar image
Horizontal/ vertical positionSpecify how close the centre of the mark is to the centre of the bar image
Omit first and last markerCheck to omit the first and last scale marker. You would want to do this if you wished to use the bar image ends as the scale markers.

The post Add bar scale markers to the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Adding points to a Slider Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-points-to-a-slider-control/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:40:11 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11371 The post Adding points to a Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
  • Open the Slider Control Wizard, and click Advanced without selecting a template. This opens the Points on slider page. This is where you can choose an image to go with each point on your Slider Control.
  • Set the point labels using the Slider Control wizard
    1. Click the Browse button to browse for an image for that point. If the image is greyscale, you can change its colour by using the Colourize button.
    Insert slider image
    1. Repeat this for each point.
    Setting the images for a slider control
    1. Click Next to choose an image for the bar. You can specify the position of the bar image.

    The post Adding points to a Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Set the Slider Control bar image https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/set-the-slider-control-bar-image/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:39:52 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11373 In the Bar page you can specify the slider bar image and position of the bar. Click Browse to find an image file to use as the slider bar. Snap XMP comes with a number of bars to choose from. When you have finished, click Next to add points to the slider. Browse Select the […]

    The post Set the Slider Control bar image appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In the Bar page you can specify the slider bar image and position of the bar.

    Click Browse to find an image file to use as the slider bar. Snap XMP comes with a number of bars to choose from.

    When you have finished, click Next to add points to the slider.

    Setting the bar properties for a slider control
    BrowseSelect the image file used for the bar
    ColourizeChoose a color to tint a grayscale bar image
    Horizontal offsetMove the bar image left and right from the centred position. Negative values move left, positive values move right. Note that large values may move the bar image out of the preview window. Enlarge the preview window to see them.
    Vertical offsetMove the bar image up and down from the baseline. Negative values move up, positive values move down. Note that large values may move the bar image out of the preview window. Enlarge the preview window to see them.
    Alt textSpecify the text that is read out by an audio browser or shown in a Web browser if images are not available.
    Show code labels/imagesDisplay the response box for quantity sliders or the code labels for single-response sliders.

    The post Set the Slider Control bar image appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using a Slider Control template https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-a-slider-control-template/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:39:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11369 Explore how to customise the Slider Control templates. Explore more about the Slider Control wizard here.

    The post Using a Slider Control template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
  • In the Questionnaire window, select the single response question that you wish to turn into a Slider Control.
  • Select Show in the toolbar topics, then select As Slider Control in the drop-down list, and check the Show box. The questionnaire window changes to display a grey box for the question (if a Slider Control has been previously defined for this question, that Slider Control will be displayed).
  • Double-click the Slider Control area to open the Slider Control wizard. The existing Slider Control templates will be displayed. The default templates show five code positions, but this will be changed to fit the number of codes that exist in your question.
  • Slider Control wizard
    1. Select the one you wish to use. It will appear in preview, allowing you to move the slider to show how the template looks at different settings.
    Previewing the slider control
    1. When you have the Slider Control you want, click OK.
    2. Click the Advanced button to customise the slider bar.

    Explore how to customise the Slider Control templates.

    Explore more about the Slider Control wizard here.

    The post Using a Slider Control template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Slider Control wizard https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/slider-control-wizard/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:39:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11365 The Slider Control wizard helps create and customise a slider control question. It opens with the option to load a slider template. Snap XMP comes with a number of slider templates that can help you create the slider quickly. A preview pane opens with the wizard and shows how the slider will be displayed during […]

    The post Slider Control wizard appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Slider Control wizard helps create and customise a slider control question. It opens with the option to load a slider template. Snap XMP comes with a number of slider templates that can help you create the slider quickly.

    A preview pane opens with the wizard and shows how the slider will be displayed during the interview.

    Click the Advanced button, if you want to customise the slider. This guides you through all the options to edit the slider.

    BY clicking Next to go to each page, you can customise:

    At the end of the Slider Control wizard, there is a summary page that gives a brief report on the options you have chosen. Click the Finish button to update the slider.

    The post Slider Control wizard appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Questionnaire Data View mode https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/questionnaire-data-view-mode/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:38:12 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11403 The Data View mode in the Questionnaire window allows you to view and print responses to the survey in the questionnaire. The responses can be viewed either as a summary showing counts and/or percentages or as responses from individual participants. You can print a list of survey results when there are survey responses available, either when the […]

    The post Questionnaire Data View mode appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Data View mode in the Questionnaire window allows you to view and print responses to the survey in the questionnaire. The responses can be viewed either as a summary showing counts and/or percentages or as responses from individual participants. You can print a list of survey results when there are survey responses available, either when the survey is live or after it closes.

    Change the Questionnaire window to Data View mode by clicking  DataModeIcon.png  on the Questionnaire window toolbar. This shows the case data in questionnaire format. There are two options available:

    • Select Case Data to view or print individual responses
    • Select Counts to view or print a summary of responses
    Data view: Case DataDisplay the individual cases in questionnaire format. This looks like the Questionnaire view in the Data Entry window. You can print the survey responses but you cannot change the data. Use the slider bar to move between the cases.
    Data view: CountsDisplay a summary of all data cases by counting responses to the questions. Answers may be displayed as:
    Absolute – the sum of responses.
    Percentage – the percentage of the number of cases. You can weights to the summary to change the balance of respondents.
    FilterOpens a filter dialog where you can enter a filter expression to limit which cases appear.
    WeightOpens a weight dialog to use a weight to change the balance of cases in the summary.

    The post Questionnaire Data View mode appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Navigation button design https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/navigation-button-design/ Wed, 06 Mar 2024 15:22:42 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11410 The type and style of the buttons of your pages are defined in the Questionnaire Properties dialog. You can set the default button style, to show with or without text, or add a custom button image. Design Select a design and color for all your buttons (and progress bar if used). Click Select Design to open an image […]

    The post Navigation button design appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The type and style of the buttons of your pages are defined in the Questionnaire Properties dialog. You can set the default button style, to show with or without text, or add a custom button image.

    1. In the Questionnaire window, click Questionnaire properties QuestionnairePropsIcon.png to display the Questionnaire Properties dialog box.
    2. Select Buttons https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/qp_but.png in the Section panel to display the buttons properties.
    Setting the buttons to use in the questionnaire
    1. Click Design to choose a style for your buttons. This opens the Navigation Design dialog.
    Selecting the navigation button design
    DesignSelect a design and color for all your buttons (and progress bar if used). Click Select Design to open an image chooser and select the design to use for all buttons.
    Progress BarSpecify if a progress bar is used and whether it is labelled Progress. Click Select Bar to open an image chooser and select the progress bar
    ToolbarSpecify if the navigation area should be colored and which color to use.
    1. Select the button design.
    2. Click OK to save the changes to all buttons.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Navigation button design appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Select button or progress bar images https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/select-button-or-progress-bar-images/ Wed, 06 Mar 2024 15:21:04 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11413 In the Select Image dialog you can Open the Select Image dialog from the Navigation Design dialog. Button design Browse Browse for the button design images. Type Choose to show CSS, Images or All button designs. Colourise Choose the colour used for the images. OK Click OK to save your selection. Progress Bar design Browse […]

    The post Select button or progress bar images appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In the Select Image dialog you can

    • choose the image used for the navigation buttons
    • choose the style of the navigation progress bar

    Open the Select Image dialog from the Navigation Design dialog.

    Button design

    BrowseBrowse for the button design images.
    TypeChoose to show CSS, Images or All button designs.
    ColouriseChoose the colour used for the images.
    OKClick OK to save your selection.

    Progress Bar design

    BrowseBrowse for the progress bar design images.
    ColouriseChoose the colour used for the images.
    OKClick OK to save your selection.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Select button or progress bar images appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Fallback fonts https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/fallback-fonts/ Wed, 06 Mar 2024 14:41:46 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11407 This lists any fonts that replace the original fonts you chose in the questionnaire design. This may happen when the fonts are not available on the device you are using. View all the Questionnaire Design tailoring options. Explore the other Tailoring survey settings.

    The post Fallback fonts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This lists any fonts that replace the original fonts you chose in the questionnaire design. This may happen when the fonts are not available on the device you are using.

    1. Click the Tailor | Questionnaire design menu option on the Snap XMP Desktop menu.
    2. Click the Fallback info button to open the Fallback Fonts information.

    View all the Questionnaire Design tailoring options.

    Explore the other Tailoring survey settings.

    The post Fallback fonts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Displaying questions in a different format https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/displaying-questions-in-a-different-format/ Wed, 06 Mar 2024 12:32:37 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11533 You can use the Show topic in the Questionnaire window to display the question in different formats in different online editions. For example, a grid may fit better on a large screen and a drop-down list may be easier to use in a mobile edition. Displaying a question in a different formats Question formats As Drop-down Display […]

    The post Displaying questions in a different format appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can use the Show topic in the Questionnaire window to display the question in different formats in different online editions. For example, a grid may fit better on a large screen and a drop-down list may be easier to use in a mobile edition.

    Displaying a question in a different formats

    1. Select the question in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select Show in the topics drop-down list.
    1. Select one of the question formats available in the next drop-down. The question formats available depend on the selected question.
    1. Select the Show checkbox to change the question to the new format. Clear the Show checkbox to return to the original question style.

    Question formats

    As Drop-downDisplay a closed question as a drop-down list.
    As Map ControlDisplay a closed question as an Map Control.
    As Slider ControlDisplay a single-response or quantity question as a Slider Control.
    As Drag and DropDisplay a closed question as a drag and drop question.
    As CarouselDisplay a question as a Carousel.
    PlaceholderAdd a placeholder to an open-ended question.
    Data PickerAdd a data picker to an open-ended question.

    You can also use the Show topic to show or hide a question and to insert a separating line between questions.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Displaying questions in a different format appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Insert a separating line between questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/insert-a-separating-line-between-questions/ Wed, 06 Mar 2024 11:12:12 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11399 The Separating Line dialog appears when you use the toolbar topic Show|Line Before to insert a horizontal line before the selected question. Separating Line dialog Style The type of line (single, double or broken) Width Width of line Colour Color of the line before the selected question You can also use the Show topic to show or hide a question and to display the question in a different format. […]

    The post Insert a separating line between questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Separating Line dialog appears when you use the toolbar topic Show|Line Before to insert a horizontal line before the selected question.

    1. Select the question in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select Show in the topics drop-down list.
    3. Select Line Before in the next drop-down.
    4. Select the Show checkbox. This lets you use the Line Style button.
    1. Click the Line Style button. This opens the Separating Line dialog where you can set the appearance of the separating line.

    Separating Line dialog

    StyleThe type of line (single, double or broken)
    WidthWidth of line
    ColourColor of the line before the selected question

    You can also use the Show topic to show or hide a question and to display the question in a different format.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Insert a separating line between questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Open Grid questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-open-grid-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:52:57 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11514 You can create a grid of open ended questions where respondents can enter their own answers. This is an Open Grid Next question. Its question box (and all subsequent boxes) will be the same size as the first box in the question. If you wish to change the responses to quantities, dates or times, select Responses in the toolbar […]

    The post Inserting Open Grid questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can create a grid of open ended questions where respondents can enter their own answers.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Open Grid First. This will allow you to set up the heading for the first of a series of questions, each of which can contain numbers or text.
    OpenGridFirst.PNG
    1. Click on the box that reads Click here for text. Type your question text and press Down Arrow or Tab.
    2. The cursor will move to the Grid Label of the first row where you can enter your text. Use Ctrl and + to make the box larger if necessary.
    3. Press Tab and type the next question text in the next line of the question.
    OpenGridNext.png

    This is an Open Grid Next question. Its question box (and all subsequent boxes) will be the same size as the first box in the question.

    1. If you need more questions press Tab again and repeat the process.

    If you wish to change the responses to quantities, dates or times, select Responses in the toolbar topic. Following questions will keep the new response type and box size.

    OpenGridNextResponse.png

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Open Grid questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Open Ended questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-open-ended-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:52:40 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11509 You can use an Open question to collect free format text, numbers, dates or times. There are three alternative styles to use Inserting an Open Ended question Use an Open Ended question to collect free format text, number, date or time. A common use is to provide space for general comments. If you wish to change the responses to […]

    The post Inserting Open Ended questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can use an Open question to collect free format text, numbers, dates or times. There are three alternative styles to use

    • Open Ended is for a single free format response.
    • Open Grid First and Open Grid Next are for free format responses for a series of similar questions, which can come under the same overall question heading.

    Inserting an Open Ended question

    Use an Open Ended question to collect free format text, number, date or time. A common use is to provide space for general comments.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Open Ended, which allows the respondent to enter free format text.
    OpenEnded.PNG
    1. Use Click on the box that reads Click here for text and type in your question text.
    2. To make the box bigger hold down the Ctrl key and press the + key. Press Ctrl and  to make the box smaller.

    If you wish to change the responses to quantities, dates or times, select Responses in the toolbar topic.

    OpenGridNextResponse.png

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Open Ended questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Semantic Scale questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-semantic-scale-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:48:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11507 Semantic scale questions allow you to measure people’s attitudes towards contrasting adjectives or objects. Each pair of items is at opposite ends of a bipolar scale. You can insert a group of semantic scale questions together. Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Semantic Scale questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Semantic scale questions allow you to measure people’s attitudes towards contrasting adjectives or objects. Each pair of items is at opposite ends of a bipolar scale. You can insert a group of semantic scale questions together.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Semantic Scale First. If it is not available in the list, select More Styles and scroll to Semantic Scale First in the Style Picker dialog, then click OK. This creates an empty question with two codes.
    SemanticScaleFirst.PNG
    1. Type your question text, for example “How would you describe the product?” Press the Down Arrow key to move to the first label. Type the adjective at one end of the scale, such as “Cheap”.
    2. Press the Image: Right Arrow key to move to the first code in the question.
    3. Press Tab to add further codes
    4. Press the Image: Right Arrow key to move to the second label and type the adjective at the other end of the scale (such as “Expensive”).
    SemanticScaleFirst2.PNG
    1. Press Tab if you wish to create a grid of semantic scale questions or press Enter to create a new question.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Semantic Scale questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Grid questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-grid-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:48:04 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11505 A Grid is made up of a series of Single Response questions, which have exactly the same choice of answers, organised in grid rows. Often they ask for people’s attitude towards something. In Snap XMP Desktop, a grid uses the styles Grid First and Grid Next. Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Grid questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Grid is made up of a series of Single Response questions, which have exactly the same choice of answers, organised in grid rows. Often they ask for people’s attitude towards something. In Snap XMP Desktop, a grid uses the styles Grid First and Grid Next.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Grid First. This will allow you to set up the headings for the first of a series of grid questions.
    GridFirst.png
    1. In the area marked Click here for text, type your question text, for example “How did you rate the following?” Press the Tab key on your keyboard.
    2. The cursor will now move to the list of codes across the top of the first grid question. Type the first of the possible answers, such as “Good”. Press Tab to create the next code. Type each subsequent answer and follow each by pressing Tab. After the last code press Down Arrow instead of Tab.
    3. The cursor will move to the text of the first Grid Label. Type the first item, such as “Speed of service” and press Tab.
    GridNext.PNG
    1. This creates the next grid row automatically changing the style to Grid Next for the second and subsequent rows. Type the next Grid Label.
    2. Press Tab to create another grid row or press Enter to complete the grid and move to a new question.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Grid questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Other questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-other-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:47:03 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11503 When you are creating a list of items it is likely the list will not contain every answer and you may want to collect further information from the respondent. One of the supplied question styles is called Other and is used to collect more information. It is designed to appear as part of the main question with […]

    The post Inserting Other questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    When you are creating a list of items it is likely the list will not contain every answer and you may want to collect further information from the respondent. One of the supplied question styles is called Other and is used to collect more information. It is designed to appear as part of the main question with its list of codes.

    1. When you complete your list of choices, press Ctrl + Enter to add an Other style question after the Multi Choice question. The style of an Other question contains a question text label and a text box for free format comments.
    2. In the area marked “Click here for text”, enter your question text.
    3. To make the text box larger press Ctrl + +. Press Ctrl + – to make the box smaller.
    Other response for a Multi Choice question

    The question number is not displayed but can be identified in the notification area of Snap XMP Desktop.

    Question information located on the status bar at the bottom of the Questionnaire window

    The post Inserting Other questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Multi Choice questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-multi-choice-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:36:17 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11501 Multi Choice questions let a respondent select one or more responses from a list. They are multiple response questions, by default, and display as check boxes to show the respondent that they can choose more than one answer. Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Multi Choice questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Multi Choice questions let a respondent select one or more responses from a list. They are multiple response questions, by default, and display as check boxes to show the respondent that they can choose more than one answer.

    1. Press Enter to start a new question after the currently selected question. By default, this is a single response question and the question style is Single Choice on the toolbar.
    2. Select the question style drop-down list on the toolbar and choose Multi Choice in the Style selection drop-down menu. The shape of the response boxes changes from a radio button to a checkbox.
    MultiChoiceQu.png
    1. You can see an area with “Click here for text”. Type your question text here.
    2. Press the Tab key on your keyboard to move the cursor into the area by the first box. This is labelled “Code Label”. Type your first answer code here then press Tab to create and move to the next code label.
    3. Continue with the text for the other code labels and press Tab after each one.
    4. When you have finished the question, press Enter to start the next question. Press Ctrl + Enter if you wish to add an “Other” question.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Multi Choice questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Showing questions as a drop-down https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/showing-questions-as-a-drop-down/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:31:41 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11499 You can show Single Choice questions, Multi Choice questions and Grid rows as drop-downs. To switch between the drop-down list or separate boxes: Explore more question styles here.

    The post Showing questions as a drop-down appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can show Single Choice questions, Multi Choice questions and Grid rows as drop-downs.

    To switch between the drop-down list or separate boxes:

    1. In the questionnaire window, select the question that you wish to turn into a drop-down.
    1. Select Show in the toolbar, then select As Drop-down in the next drop-down list
    2. Select the Show box to show the question as a drop-down. The question is now shown as a drop-down.
    1. Clear the Show box to show the question as response boxes.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Showing questions as a drop-down appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Single Choice questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-single-choice-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:30:24 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11497 Single Choice questions let the respondent select one response from a list. They are single response questions, by default, and display as radio buttons to show the respondent that they should only choose one answer. Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Single Choice questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Single Choice questions let the respondent select one response from a list. They are single response questions, by default, and display as radio buttons to show the respondent that they should only choose one answer.

    1. Press Enter to start a new question after the currently selected question. By default, this is a single response question and the question style is Single Choice on the toolbar, showing radio buttons as the response box style.
    1. You can see an area with “Click here for text”. Type your question text here.
    2. Press the Tab key on your keyboard and the cursor will move into an area by the first box, labelled “Code Label”. Type your first answer code here then press Tab to create and move to the next code label.
    3. Continue with the text for the other code labels and press Tab after each one.
    4. When you have finished the question you can press Enter to start the next question.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Single Choice questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Notes in your questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-notes-in-your-questionnaire/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:25:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11494 Notes are questions that provide text information and include Add a note to your questionnaire by inserting text in one of these styles. Inserting a title or sub-title A questionnaire normally starts with a heading together with text to explain its purpose and how it should be completed. As soon as a new questionnaire starts, […]

    The post Inserting Notes in your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Notes are questions that provide text information and include

    • Title
    • Sub Title
    • Instruction

    Add a note to your questionnaire by inserting text in one of these styles.

    Inserting a title or sub-title

    A questionnaire normally starts with a heading together with text to explain its purpose and how it should be completed. As soon as a new questionnaire starts, there are placeholders for a title and then a sub-title.

    1. In the area marked “Click here for text”, type the name of your survey. The style displayed in the ribbon at the top of the window is pre-set to Title. The default layout and font for the title is black text in Arial font on a white background.
    2. Press Enter when you have set up your title. This displays a sub-title area automatically. The Sub Title style is on the toolbar.
    3. Type your sub-title text.
    InsertTitle.PNG
    1. Press Enter when you have set up your title and sub-title.

    The text of the sub-title automatically moves onto the next line as you type. If you want to force a new line as part of the text of the title or sub-title, click on the appropriate location and press Shift and Enter.

    Inserting an instruction

    An Instruction can appear anywhere in the questionnaire and can be a note to an interviewer or guidelines to a respondent on how to complete the next section of the questionnaire.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question when you have set up your title and sub-title.
    2. Change the style to Instruction in the style selection box. This allows you to enter free format text that appears across the entire column of the questionnaire.
    3. Type your instruction or information text in the box.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Notes in your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Texts settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/texts-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:30:45 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11304 The Text section specifies the text for common strings in Snap XMP Desktop. Select Choose a previously saved file of text strings to use. Save As Save all the current text strings to a new file that can be used in a different survey. List of text strings The list of text strings show text […]

    The post Texts settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Text section specifies the text for common strings in Snap XMP Desktop.

    QP-Texts.PNG

    Select

    Choose a previously saved file of text strings to use.

    Save As

    Save all the current text strings to a new file that can be used in a different survey.

    List of text strings

    The list of text strings show text that is used in your current survey. You can change the strings to ones in a different language or using a different vocabulary by clicking Select then selecting the new library.

    Current string

    An editable field showing how the original string will be represented for this survey

    >

    Click to display appropriate fields to embed in the text message. For example {question} will insert the question name.

    English original

    Displays the default message text in English.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Texts settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Alerts settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/alerts-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:30:24 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11302 The Alerts section allows you to set up email alerts when a participant meets a condition while completing the response, such as entering contact details to receive further information. Click New to create a new email alert or click Clone to create a copy of an existing alert. Select an alert then click Edit to edit an […]

    The post Alerts settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Alerts section allows you to set up email alerts when a participant meets a condition while completing the response, such as entering contact details to receive further information.

    QP-Alerts.PNG

    Click New to create a new email alert or click Clone to create a copy of an existing alert.

    Select an alert then click Edit to edit an existing alert or Delete to remove the alert.

    See also Setting up email alerts.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Alerts settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Paradata settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/paradata-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:29:57 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11299 The Paradata settings contain system variables containing information about how the survey was conducted, the participant and their data response. This information is available for analysis along with the data response that the participant submits. To include a paradata variable, select the system variable, then select Display in questionnaire. Paradata settings Case Provides a unique identifier for […]

    The post Paradata settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Paradata settings contain system variables containing information about how the survey was conducted, the participant and their data response. This information is available for analysis along with the data response that the participant submits.

    To include a paradata variable, select the system variable, then select Display in questionnaire.

    QP-Paradata.PNG

    Paradata settings

    CaseProvides a unique identifier for a case or data response.
    CompletedSet to Completed when the respondent has submitted the survey.
    Duration Records the time that the respondent takes to complete an interview. The calculation is the difference between the start time and the end time. The unit is minutes to 2 decimal places, for example, 3.25 which gives 3 minutes and 15 seconds.
    End Date Records the date that the respondent completes the interview.
    End Time Records the time that the respondent submits the interview.
    GeolocationAllows an online survey to store the geographic location that a mobile interview takes place.
    Interviewer Selecting the Display in questionnaire box creates a new question in the questionnaire, allowing you to select the interviewer. This is set once when the interviewer opens the survey to collect responses. This is the login name on the Interviewer app.
    Language Available in an online multi-language survey. Selecting Display in questionnaire creates a language question, which respondent uses to select the language that they wish to use.
    PageThe Page paradata variable is a single choice question which you can use to define the number of pages.
    Panel
    This is an optional pre-defined variable that can be used for the survey panel index. This must be set up or pre-seeded from a database.
    ParticipantThis stores the unique participant id, which is the login name for the survey. This must be pre-seeded from a participant in a participant database.
    Password This stores the password for password regulated surveys. This must be pre-seeded from a password in a participant database.
    RecordingAllows you to record the whole interviewer in the Interviewer app.
    Site Selecting the Display in questionnaire box creates a new question. This allows you to set the Site. This is set once each time the survey is opened to collect responses.
    Start Date Records the date that the respondent starts the interview.
    Start Time Records the time that the respondent starts the interview and the first question displays.
    Survey Index Records the subject for Group questionnaires.
    URLThis is an optional pre-defined variable that can be used for the URL of the calling site. This must be set up or pre-seeded from a database.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Paradata settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    SOI settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/soi-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:29:31 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11297 The SOI section contains the settings for the Interviewer app, including timeouts and image size shown for questions with attached files.

    The post SOI settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The SOI section contains the settings for the Interviewer app, including timeouts and image size shown for questions with attached files.

    QP-SOI.PNG

    The post SOI settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Accessibility settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/accessibility-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:29:03 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11295 The Accessibility settings are used to force your questionnaire to conform to the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) accessibility guidelines. These are designed to ensure that those who are visually impaired and those who use electronic readers to read web content are able to read the questionnaires. For more information on the options, go to the Accessibility section. Surveys to […]

    The post Accessibility settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Accessibility settings are used to force your questionnaire to conform to the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) accessibility guidelines. These are designed to ensure that those who are visually impaired and those who use electronic readers to read web content are able to read the questionnaires.

    For more information on the options, go to the Accessibility section.

    QP-Access.PNG

    Surveys to Produce

    Select how the surveys will be published

    Standard Version Only

    Publish as designed including images and other HTML features

    Plain Version Only

    Publish a plain text version that complies with the priority 1 section of the W3C guidelines.

    Standard and Plain Versions

    Publish both.

    Web links

    Only available if Standard and Plain Versions selected

    Link to plain text

    Places the specified text as a link to the plain text version at the top of the normal version. Text defaults to “text only”.

    Link from plain text

    Places the specified text as a link to the normal version at the top of the plain text version. (No default text.)

    W3C Accessibility options

     

    Plain version uses no colours

    Check this to change coloring to black on a white background.

    Plain version has no images

    Check this to remove all images from the output. Only needed if using a background image or animated graphics.

    Plain version has no dynamic routing

    Check this to disable dynamic routing and masking. Other dynamic content such as variable substitution, code rotation etc. is always disabled

    Use strict rules

    Use rules specified in the dialog which appears when you click on Details. These are further described in the Strict Rules section of the Snap website.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Accessibility settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Layout settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/layout-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:28:41 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11293 Layout The Layout section allows you to specify which standard components, such as a logo or title, appear on every page of your survey and how they look. Use the first title as the main title on all pages: Check to make the title on the first page appear on all subsequent pages. Add progress […]

    The post Layout settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Layout

    The Layout section allows you to specify which standard components, such as a logo or title, appear on every page of your survey and how they look.

    QP-Layout.PNG
    Use the first title as the main title on all pages: Check to make the title on the first page appear on all subsequent pages.
    Add progress text to browser tabAdd progress text to the header of the browser tab
    Other components Specify which components appear on every survey page, and how they look.
    Divider Text or a graphic (normally a line) that separates the questions from the button area (left right or centred). Selecting this unselects Tool Bar.
    Tool Bar A background color or image used to define the area where the buttons are. Selecting this unselects Divider.
    Progress Bar A graphic or text showing respondents how far through the survey they are (appears where specified).
    Logo Company logo that appears on the tool bar (left right or centred).
    End of Page Text, a line or a graphic that appears below the tool bar (left, right or centred).
    Use in survey Check to use the selected component in the survey.
    Use Image If checked, use the image specified in Image to represent the component. If clear, use the text specified in Text.
    Image Specify the image used to represent the selected component.
    Text Text that is used to represent the selected component. You can insert HTML codes between angle brackets. E.g., to insert an HTML horizontal line, type <<hr>>. If the Image box has been checked, this text is used as the ALT text for the image (displayed if the image is not available).
    Alignment Specify the position of the selected component (image or text) on the toolbar. You can specify the position of the Progress Bar on the page using the secondary drop-down list.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Layout settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Buttons settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/buttons-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:28:17 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11291 The Buttons section specifies the buttons that are used in the interview and the appearance of the buttons. Button Specify which buttons appear on the survey page, and how they look. They always appear in the following order. Back Go to previous page. Reset Page Clear all respondent’s entries on this page. Restart Close the […]

    The post Buttons settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Buttons section specifies the buttons that are used in the interview and the appearance of the buttons.

    QP-Buttons.PNG
    Button Specify which buttons appear on the survey page, and how they look. They always appear in the following order.
    Back Go to previous page.
    Reset Page Clear all respondent’s entries on this page.
    Restart Close the current interview and restart the survey.
    Print Print the current page.
    Save Save the current state of the survey.
    Next Go to the next page. This is always used.
    Submit Submit the survey. This is always used.
    Use in survey Check to use the selected button in the survey.
    Text Plain text that appears on a basic button.
    Alternative text If an image is used, this text is used as the ALT text for the image which is displayed if the image is not available.
    Pages Select which pages of the interview the selected button is displayed.
    Appearance Specify an individual image used to represent the selected component. You can also select a plain text representation of the button. You do not need to specify individual images if you are using a design.
    Alignment Position of the buttons on the toolbar (the same setting applies to all the buttons).
    Design Open the Navigation Design dialog to specify the scheme used for the tool bar area (button and toolbar colours, and whether the progress bar is present).

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Buttons settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Interview settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/interview-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:27:49 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11289 The Interview section allows you to control aspects of validation, routing and mandatory questions during the interview. A new interviewer that runs the live survey interviews has been introduced in build 12.10. This was previously set in the Interview section by selecting the option Use new interviewer (beta). The new interviewer is used by default on all […]

    The post Interview settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Interview section allows you to control aspects of validation, routing and mandatory questions during the interview.

    A new interviewer that runs the live survey interviews has been introduced in build 12.10. This was previously set in the Interview section by selecting the option Use new interviewer (beta). The new interviewer is used by default on all new surveys. The legacy interviewer settings are accessed using the Advanced button. The legacy options are set on for any previously created survey where Use new interviewer (beta) was not selected.

    New features will only be implemented in the new interviewer. These include question carousels and displaying calculations on the same page without enforced page breaks. If a new feature, such as a question carousel, is added to a survey, the new interviewer will be used automatically.

    To use the new interviewer, click the Advanced button and clear the options Use legacy interviewer engine and Generate legacy HTML layout.

    Interview settings

    Enforce “must answer” setting

    Select to enforce that all questions that have Must Answer set in the variable properties are answered.

    Follow routing

    Select to enable the routing.

    Validate responses

    Select this option to validate responses against the information given in the Variable properties (Pattern, Valid range and Max/Min for multiple responses).

    Allow ordering of codes and grids

    Uncheck to keep the position of codes and grids constant (disable the Ordering property of the variables).

    Drop a cookie

    Select this to saves a cookie on the participant’s device that records their position in the survey. This should prevent them completing multiple copies of the questionnaire until the cookie expires.

    Display usage warning.

    Select this to display a warning that the survey uses cookies.

    Advanced This displays the interview options:
    Use legacy interviewer engine runs interviews using the interviewer engine used in Snap 11 and the default engine used in Snap XMP Desktop prior to build 12.10.
    Generate legacy HTML layout generates the HTML layout for interviews as used in Snap 11 and the default used in Snap XMP Desktop prior to build 12.10. This will result is a less accessible layout.
    These settings are not recommended for new surveys as you will not be able to take advantage of some new features but may be used for older upgraded surveys where the survey should behave in the same way as previous interviews.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Interview settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Submit settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/submit-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:26:58 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11287 The Submit section allows you to set the action performed when the participant submits or saves their response. The available options are Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Submit settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Submit section allows you to set the action performed when the participant submits or saves their response.

    The available options are

    • Default which displays a default thank you page provided by Snap Surveys
    • Web page which allows you to specify a web page that the participant is taken to after they submit or save their response. This option can be left blank, in which case participants will receive the default thank you page.
    • Close which closes the web browser window after the participant submits their response when the survey is displayed in a pop up window. Please note this will not work when the survey is being displayed in a normal web browser. In this case, the default page is displayed.
    QP-Submit.PNG

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Submit settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Margins settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/margins-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:26:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11285 The Margins section contains settings that specify page margins and the number of page columns to use. Different settings are available for online editions and paper editions. Left Top Right Bottom Define the distance between the text and the specified margin. The distance is given in pixels (px) for screen output and in centimeters (cm) […]

    The post Margins settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Margins section contains settings that specify page margins and the number of page columns to use. Different settings are available for online editions and paper editions.

    QP-MarginsPC.PNG

    Left
    Top
    Right
    Bottom

    Define the distance between the text and the specified margin. The distance is given in pixels (px) for screen output and in centimeters (cm) for printed output.

    Swap on even page

    Check to swap the left and right margins between odd and even pages. Set margins used for odd pages, reversed margins for even pages. Paper output only

    Columns

    Set the number of columns on screen and paper

    Column Gap

    Set the space between the columns. This is set as a fixed width in cm for paper outputs, and a percentage of the window in screen outputs.

    Column Separator

    Open the Separating Line dialog to set the style of vertical line separating the columns. Paper output only

    Justify Vertically

    Check to align the top and bottom of the columns. Paper output only

    QP-MarginsPaper.PNG

    In paper editions, click the Column Separator button to set the appearance of the column separator.

    QP-ColSeparator.PNG
    • Style selects the type of vertical line with <none> set as the default.
    • Width selects the width of the printed line
    • Colour selects the color of the printed line.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Margins settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Page settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/page-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:26:05 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11283 The Page section contains the page settings, with different options available for online and paper editions. In paper editions, you can In online editions, you can Changing the page or screen size This changes the questionnaire page layout for online editions or page size for paper editions. In online editions, the page size determines which […]

    The post Page settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Page section contains the page settings, with different options available for online and paper editions.

    In paper editions, you can

    • set the page size
    • set the background colour and picture
    • choose the page orientation as portrait or landscape
    • choose to print the questionnaire as a booklet
    • set the headers and footers on each page
    QP-PagePaper.PNG

    In online editions, you can

    • set the screen size
    • set the background colour and picture
    • choose whether to allow scrolling
    QP-PagePC.PNG

    Changing the page or screen size

    This changes the questionnaire page layout for online editions or page size for paper editions. In online editions, the page size determines which edition is displayed on a device, letting you produce adaptive questionnaires.

    1. In the Questionnaire window, change to the edition for the required output, for example, Paper, Phone or PC/Laptop.
    2. Click Questionnaire Properties QuestionnairePropsIcon.png to open the Questionnaire Properties dialog.
    3. In Section, select the Page section.
    4. In online editions, in Width, enter the screen width of the device you want this edition to display. The screen width will be different if the device in held in landscape and portrait mode, so choose the appropriate value. Alternatively, select a standard screen size in the drop-down.
    5. In paper editions, in Width and Height, enter the page width and height you want to print this edition on. Alternatively, select a standard paper size in the drop-down.
    6. Click OK to save your changes.

    If the questionnaire will be used on a specific devices then you can test the questionnaire works as expected on that device. Often, participants will use a variety of devices and you will need to test on a number of different sized devices to ensure the layout of each edition is correct.

    Note that if you change the page size for one edition, it may affect which of the other questionnaires is delivered to a device.

    Adding a picture to the background

    Snap Surveys provides a range of background images for surveys that you can download and use in your surveys.

    1. Select Background in the topic drop-down.
    2. In the next drop-down, select the area to apply the background. To apply the background to the entire question, select (All). To apply the background to the all pages, select (Page).
    3. Click the Picture button. This displays the Picture dialog.
    4. Select a picture from the file name drop-down or click Browse to browse for the picture file. The picture path name is shown in the drop-down. Click Remove to clear the picture.
    1. You can align the picture horizontally using the Horizontal drop-down, with Left, Centre and Right options. You can align the picture vertically using the Vertical drop-down, with Top, Centre, Bottom options.
    2. The area assigned for the selected part of the question determines the size of the picture. For an online edition you can select Tile or Fixed to repeat or fix the image. For a paper edition you can select Stretch or Fit to resize the image or Tile and Zoom to repeat or scale the image. This can be done both horizontally and vertically.
    3. If available, you can colourize the GIF file by selecting a color from the drop-down.
    4. Click Zoom and enter a percentage value to resize the image in the background.
    5. Click OK to save the changes.

    Using a picture with a background

    If the background uses a color and a picture, the color shows in areas where the picture does not fill the space. The background preview area on the toolbar shows a split view with the color in the top half and the picture in the bottom half.

    Changes to the background are the same in all language editions for a single output edition, but will not change other output editions as this affects the style.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Page settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Edition settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/edition-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:23:26 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11280 This section provides details about the edition, publication medium and language for the selected edition in the Questionnaire window. These details are read only. The editions can be edited in the Editions and Style Templates window, available from the Questionnaire toolbar. Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Edition settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This section provides details about the edition, publication medium and language for the selected edition in the Questionnaire window. These details are read only.

    QP-Editions.PNG

    The editions can be edited in the Editions and Style Templates window, available from the Questionnaire toolbar.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Edition settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Reporting on variables https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/reporting-on-variables/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:14:31 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11344 You can print summary reports and full reports including all variables in a survey or from a specified list. Title The title appears at the top of the report. All This includes all variables in the Variables window in the report. When the selection field is cleared All is automatically selected. Specify selection This includes […]

    The post Reporting on variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can print summary reports and full reports including all variables in a survey or from a specified list.

    1. Click PrintIcon.PNG on the Variable window toolbar to display the Print Variable Details dialog. You can also select File | Print Report, or press Ctrl + P.
    Print the details of the survey variables
    1. Select the report settings you would like.
    Title The title appears at the top of the report.
    All This includes all variables in the Variables window in the report. When the selection field is cleared All is automatically selected.
    Specify selection This includes the selected list of variables in the report. When you enter a selection Specify selection is automatically selected. You can use a comma-separated list or the word to for a range. Selecting a group of variables in the Variables window prior to opening the Print Variable Details dialog will automatically enter this selection.

    Style

    You can choose from Summary, Details (single column), Details (double column). Summary prints a list of the variables as shown in the Variables window. The Details report prints the variable details, including codes and values for each variable. The format selected determines whether the data is printed in a single column or double column format.
    Print Prints the selected report.
    Setup

    Opens the Page Setup dialog to specify the layout of your report.

    1. When your selection is complete, press Print to output the required report.

    The post Reporting on variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Viewing sources and dependencies https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/viewing-sources-and-dependencies/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:10:40 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11342 You cannot delete a variable if its definition refers to another variable as there is a dependency. This happens when a variable is: You can view Sources and Dependencies by clicking . In the example below, the variable Q3a depends on Q3, as Q3a is only asked if the respondent answers Other to Q3. You […]

    The post Viewing sources and dependencies appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You cannot delete a variable if its definition refers to another variable as there is a dependency.

    This happens when a variable is:

    • used in routing
    • used by a derived variable
    • inserted in the label of a variable
    • used in an analysis variable

    You can view Sources and Dependencies by clicking SourceDependIcon.PNG .

    1. Click VariablesIcon.png to open the Variables window.
    2. Highlight the variable you wish to inspect and click SourceDependIcon.PNG .
    3. The Sources/Dependencies window opens, showing the selected variable together with any source variables (variables that it depends on) and any variables, reports or analyses that depend on it.

    In the example below, the variable Q3a depends on Q3, as Q3a is only asked if the respondent answers Other to Q3. You cannot delete Q3 until the Not Asked condition in Q3a is removed.

    Source and dependencies of the selected variable

    In the Sources/Dependencies window you can

    • check the details of a dependent by selecting it and clicking VariablePropsIcon.png
    • display the sources/dependencies of a variable by selecting it and clicking SourceDependIcon.PNG or double-clicking the variable
    • move to the previous view in the Sources/Dependencies window by clicking UndoIcon.png
    • move forward by clicking RedoIcon.png

    The post Viewing sources and dependencies appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Show or hide questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/show-or-hide-questions/ Thu, 01 Feb 2024 16:10:26 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11163 You can show or hide a question in a questionnaire using the Show topic in the Questionnaire window. Showing or hiding the question When the question is hidden you can still access it by selecting the Hidden label. Showing or hiding part of a question You can also use the Show topic to display a question in a […]

    The post Show or hide questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can show or hide a question in a questionnaire using the Show topic in the Questionnaire window.

    Showing or hiding the question

    1. Select Show from the toolbar topic menu.
    2. Select (All) from the question element list.
    1. Clear the Show box to hide the question. Select the Show box to display the question.

    When the question is hidden you can still access it by selecting the Hidden label.

    Showing or hiding part of a question

    1. Select Show from the toolbar topic menu.
    2. Select the question element from the element list.
    1. Clear the Show box to hide the question element. Select the Show box to display the question element.

    You can also use the Show topic to display a question in a different format and to insert a separating line between questions.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Show or hide questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the position relative to the question https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-position-relative-to-the-question/ Thu, 01 Feb 2024 15:17:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11161 The Positions topic determines the relative position of the question text, associated code boxes and footnote. The question text can be placed above or beside the question. The default setting is for the question text to appear above the list of codes and the footnote to appear below the list of codes. When you select Beside, the […]

    The post Changing the position relative to the question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Positions topic determines the relative position of the question text, associated code boxes and footnote.

    The question text can be placed above or beside the question. The default setting is for the question text to appear above the list of codes and the footnote to appear below the list of codes.

    When you select Beside, the question text is to the left of the question codes.

    When you change the position of the code box, it is changed relative to the code label. This is usually set to Left or Right for single or multi-choice codes, and Below for the first row of a grid.

    The footnote text can be placed below or beside the question. When you select Beside, the question text is to the right of the question codes.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Changing the position relative to the question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the question margins https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-question-margins/ Wed, 31 Jan 2024 15:58:35 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11155 The Margins determine the amount of space around individual elements of a question. You can spread the questions elements further apart to make the text easier to read. You can make the question elements closer together to reduce the amount of space needed for the question. The elements of the question that you can alter in Margins are: […]

    The post Changing the question margins appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Margins determine the amount of space around individual elements of a question. You can spread the questions elements further apart to make the text easier to read. You can make the question elements closer together to reduce the amount of space needed for the question.

    The elements of the question that you can alter in Margins are: (All), Name, Text, Grid Name, Grid Label, Position, Code Label, Code Value, Data, Check Mark, Code GoTo and Footnote.

    MarginsBar.PNG

    You can alter the left, right, top and bottom margins by using the up and down buttons, or typing in new values.

    Using (All)

    If (All) is selected, the entire question, including the name, text and all of the codes and code labels, moves. Adjusting the left margin moves the entire question to the right. When you increase the top margin, the spacing at the top of each question element increases. The effect is to space out the entire question.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Changing the question margins appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the font https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-font/ Wed, 31 Jan 2024 14:30:40 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11137 You can change the way any text in a question looks, using the Font topic in the Questionnaire window. The Font topic is the default topic when you open the Questionnaire window. Changes made to the text affects all language editions for the same publication but does not change editions for different publications. Change the […]

    The post Changing the font appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can change the way any text in a question looks, using the Font topic in the Questionnaire window. The Font topic is the default topic when you open the Questionnaire window. Changes made to the text affects all language editions for the same publication but does not change editions for different publications.

    Change the font type and size

    1. In the Questionnaire window, select Font in the topic drop-down list.
    2. Select the text, or position the cursor at the start of the change.
    3. Select the font type from the drop-down list of fonts available on the device.
    1. Select the font size from the drop-down list of font sizes available for the selected font type.

    Bold, Italic and Underline

    1. In the Questionnaire window, select Font in the topic drop-down list.
    2. Select the text, or position the cursor at the start of the change.
    3. Click TextBoldIcon.png to make your text bold, TextItalicIcon.png to make it italic or TextUnderlineIcon.png to underline it.

    Highlight the text

    1. In the Questionnaire window, select Font in the topic drop-down list.
    2. Select the text, or position the cursor at the start of the change.
    3. Click TextHighlightIcon.png to highlight it in the highlight colour.
    1. Change the highlight colour by right-clicking to show the colour palette. Select the highlight colour or click No Highlight at the top of the colour palette.

    Change the text colour

    1. In the Questionnaire window, select Font in the topic drop-down list.
    2. Select the text, or position the cursor at the start of the change.
    3. If you wish to change the text colour, select a different colour in the drop-down list.

    Clear all formatting

    1. In the Questionnaire window, select Font in the topic drop-down list.
    2. Select the text that you want to change.
    3. Click Reset to clear all formatting from the selected text.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Changing the font appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the column layout for a question https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-column-layout-for-a-question/ Tue, 30 Jan 2024 16:56:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11124 In the Questionnaire window, you can set different column layout using the Columns topic. Setting the column layout Setting a multi column layout The default settings are Columns set to 1 and Down set on. The codes are displayed underneath in each other in one column. In this example, there are 2 columns and the order […]

    The post Changing the column layout for a question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In the Questionnaire window, you can set different column layout using the Columns topic.

    • Columns where you can display the answer choices or codes over one or more columns.
    • Grid sets the number of columns equal to the number of codes in the question.
    • Down or Across selects the display order of the codes in the columns.
    • Full Page sets the question text and code list to the full-page width.
    • Semantic shows the grid rows in a semantic style format.
    • Compound places adjacent grids in a column layout horizontally across the page.
    • None shows the codes adjacent to each other with no columns.

    Setting the column layout

    1. Select the question or questions that you want to change.
    2. Select Columns in the Questionnaire topics menu.
    1. In Columns, set the number of columns to display the answer codes. The default is 1 column. You can choose from 1 column to a maximum of 20 columns. When you have a large number of columns, check that the labels are easy to read. The Columns option is only available for single and multiple-choice questions only.
    2. Click Grid to show the answer codes as a single line across the page. The number of columns is always the same as the number of codes. If you have a large number of codes, check that the label text shows fully in the available space. The Grid option is only available for single and multiple-choice questions only.
    3. Click Full Page to show the both the question text and answer list using the full-page width. This ignores the columns settings specified in the Page section of the questionnaire properties. This is available for all questions.
    4. You can toggle between Down and Across. Down orders the codes with the first code at the top of the first column, the second code underneath it. Across orders the codes with the first code at the top of the first column and the second code at the top of the second column. The Down and Across option is only available for single and multiple-choice questions only.
    5. You can only use Compound when there are adjacent Grid questions. This places the grids in a column layout horizontally across the page.

    Setting a multi column layout

    The default settings are Columns set to 1 and Down set on. The codes are displayed underneath in each other in one column.

    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated

    In this example, there are 2 columns and the order is set to Down. The codes are positioned below each other before starting the next column

    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated

    Setting a grid layout

    Selecting the Grid option sets the number of columns equal to the number of codes in the question.

    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated

    When the number of codes is high, you may not be able to see all the code labels or boxes. To resolve this, you can use Full Page, reduce the length of the label text, or organise the question into a number of columns.

    Setting the layout down or across

    When the codes are displayed in columns, the order can be determined using the Down or Across buttons. The default is Down. The order shows the first code at the top of the first column with the second code underneath it. This continues until the column is broken and the next code is displayed at the top of the next column.

    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated

    When you select Across, the order of the codes shows the first code at the top of the first column with the second code at the top of the second column, which continues to the maximum number of columns. Then the next code is displayed second in the list of the first column.

    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated

    Setting a full-page layout

    When you select Full Page, the layout of the question uses the entire width of the page and will ignore the columns settings in the questionnaire page setup. This is useful where you require some questions, such as instructions, to be full width and other questions to be a smaller width. If you set the page width as the full width, then the layout will not change.

    Semantic layout

    Semantic scale questions use contrasting adjectives or objects where each pair of items is at opposite ends of a bipolar scale, such as Good to Poor. When you add a Semantic Scale question, this automatically selects the Semantic option in the Columns topic.

    You can also display grids as a semantic scale by selecting the Semantic button.

    This takes the first and last grid headers and displays the option boxes in between the two opposite descriptions. Note that the code labels need to be visible for each grid row.

    Compound

    When you select Compound ,the live interview shows the grids next to each other. The grids do not change position in the Questionnaire design window. There are more options available using the Compound topic.

    A screenshot of a survey

Description automatically generated

    Setting a no columns layout

    This settings removes the column layout. The codes labels display adjacent to each other with no columns. This setting is usually used with questions that show as buttons.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Changing the column layout for a question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Finding text in the questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/finding-text-in-the-questionnaire/ Mon, 29 Jan 2024 09:42:42 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11107 You can find text in the questionnaire window when you are in Design or Style mode. Use the controls Find Next   to find the next occurrence and Find Previous   to find the previous occurrence. The box containing the search text will store any previous searches in a drop-down list, so you can repeat searches without retyping the text. This […]

    The post Finding text in the questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can find text in the questionnaire window when you are in Design or Style mode.

    1. Select Find in the toolbar topics drop-down list.
    2. Type in the search text in the empty box to the right of the topics drop-down list.
    1. Press Enter to search the questionnaire, from the current cursor position to the end of the questionnaire.This highlights the first example of the search text.
    2. Press Enter again and to search for the next example.
    3. At the end of the questionnaire, confirm to continue the search from the beginning of the questionnaire.

    Use the controls Find Next   to find the next occurrence and Find Previous   to find the previous occurrence.

    The box containing the search text will store any previous searches in a drop-down list, so you can repeat searches without retyping the text. This is cleared when the Questionnaire window is closed.

    Replacing text

    Click Find/Replace to open the Find dialog where you have more options to find and replace text.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Finding text in the questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adding borders to a question https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-borders-to-a-question/ Mon, 29 Jan 2024 09:42:24 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11099 You can make a question stand out by adding a border. You can choose the style, width and colour of the question border. Add the border Style Specify the type of line used as a border. Width Specify the width of line used as a border. Colour Specify the border color. This change affects all […]

    The post Adding borders to a question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can make a question stand out by adding a border. You can choose the style, width and colour of the question border.

    Add the border

    1. Select the question or questions in the Questionnaire window.
    2. In the topic drop-down, select Border.
    3. Choose the style, width and colour of the border. This changes all sides of the border. You can see the border changes in the Questionnaire window.
    StyleSpecify the type of line used as a border.
    WidthSpecify the width of line used as a border.
    ColourSpecify the border color.
    1. Click the Advanced button to set the appearance of each side of the border.

    This change affects all language edition of the same publication, such as all online editions, but the change is not shown in other publication editions, such as paper editions.

    Advanced border settings

    Set the border properties for each side of the border. You can see the border changes in the Questionnaire window.

    Click Close to return to the Questionnaire window.

    EdgeChoose the border edge to change (you can also click the image).
    StyleSpecify the type of line used as a border.
    WidthSpecify the width of line used as a border.
    ColourSpecify the border color.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Adding borders to a question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the question background https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-question-background/ Mon, 29 Jan 2024 09:42:00 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11087 You can change the background of the page, all the question elements or a single question element, to show a plain color and/or an image as the background. The picture below shows some of the elements that can have a background color or image. Changing the background color Adding a picture to the background If […]

    The post Changing the question background appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can change the background of the page, all the question elements or a single question element, to show a plain color and/or an image as the background. The picture below shows some of the elements that can have a background color or image.

    Question elements with labels

    Changing the background color

    1. Select Background in the topic drop-down.
    2. In the next drop-down, select the area to apply the background. To apply the background to the entire question, select (All). To apply the background to the all pages, select (Page).
    3. Click the Colour button, and select a color from the palette.
    Topics toolbar showing background settings

    Adding a picture to the background

    1. Select Background in the topic drop-down.
    2. In the next drop-down, select the area to apply the background. To apply the background to the entire question, select (All). To apply the background to the all pages, select (Page).
    3. Click the Picture button. This displays the Picture dialog.
    4. Select a picture from the file name drop-down or click Browse to browse for the picture file. The picture path name is shown in the drop-down. Click Remove to clear the picture.
    1. You can align the picture horizontally using the Horizontal drop-down, with Left, Centre and Right options. You can align the picture vertically using the Vertical drop-down, with Top, Centre, Bottom options.
    2. The area assigned for the selected part of the question determines the size of the picture. For an online edition you can select Tile or Fixed to repeat or fix the image. For a paper edition you can select Stretch or Fit to resize the image or Tile and Zoom to repeat or scale the image. This can be done both horizontally and vertically.
    3. If available, you can colourize the GIF file by selecting a color from the drop-down.
    4. Click Zoom and enter a percentage value to resize the image in the background.
    5. Click OK to save the changes.

    If the background uses a color and a picture, the color shows in areas where the picture does not fill the space. The background preview area on the toolbar shows a split view with the color in the top half and the picture in the bottom half.

    Changes to the background are the same in all language editions for a single output edition, but will not change other output editions as this affects the style.

    Adding highlighting in online editions

    Highlighting a row makes it clear to the respondent which choice they are selecting. When a respondent moves the mouse over a question, the question label and answer box are highlighted in this color.

    Row highlight for selected questions

    1. Select the question or questions to highlight.
    2. Select Background in the topic drop-down.
    3. Select Row Highlight in the second drop-down list.
    4. Click the Colour button, and select a color from the palette.
    Highlighting a question

    The selected question(s) will now have a highlight when the respondent selects them in an online survey.

    Row highlight for all questions

    1. Select the question to highlight.
    2. Click Style mode StyleModeIcon.png on the Questionnaire window toolbar. This changes to style mode and the selected question highlight changes to red.
    3. To make highlighting available on all questions, select All Styles from the style menu on the left.
    4. Set the toolbar topic to Background.
    5. Select Row Highlight in the second drop-down list.
    6. Click the Colour button, and select a color from the palette.
    Applying a highlight to questions in Style mode

    All styles will now be highlighted when selected in an online questionnaire.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Changing the question background appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Aligning text https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/aligning-text/ Mon, 29 Jan 2024 09:41:24 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11069 The Alignment topic controls the justification of the question elements that contain text. You can choose to align all the elements in the selected question or align an individual element. You can select the element in the drop-down or click the area of the question you want to align. The available elements are: Name, Text, Grid Name, […]

    The post Aligning text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Alignment topic controls the justification of the question elements that contain text. You can choose to align all the elements in the selected question or align an individual element. You can select the element in the drop-down or click the area of the question you want to align.

    The available elements are: Name, Text, Grid Name, Grid Label, Code Label, Code Value, Data, Code Box, Code GoTo, Footnote and Answer Area.

    • You can specify the horizontal alignment as Left, Centre or Right.
    Left alignment of code label text
    Right alignment of code label text
    • You can specify the vertical alignment as Auto, Top, Middle or Bottom. 

    The alignment set in the question style determines the default settings of the horizontal and vertical alignment.

    The alignment can be set for each edition in the survey, for example, you can change the appearance to fit a paper or online survey.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Aligning text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Questionnaire topics: Customising questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/questionnaire-topics-customising-questions/ Mon, 29 Jan 2024 09:40:20 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11064 You can customise the questions in your questionnaire using the topics menu in the Questionnaire window.

    The post Questionnaire topics: Customising questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can customise the questions in your questionnaire using the topics menu in the Questionnaire window.

    • Alignment sets left, centre or right alignment for each question element.
    • Background sets the colours and patterns of the background for question elements.  To set backgrounds for the entire questionnaire use page set-up.
    • Border allows you to apply borders to questions.
    • Boxes sets the shape and size of the boxes for the question codes.
    • Break inserts a page break, column break or a section break.
    • Columns sets the number of columns used to display the question codes.
    • Compound specifies whether the grid is part of a compound grid. This is only available in Design mode.
    • Find allows text to be found and/or replaced with questionnaire text.
    • Font sets the font type,size andcolor, with settings for bold, italics, underline.
    • Margins sets the left, right, top and bottom margins for each element of a question or text item.
    • Numbering shows the method of question numbering for each question, together with inclusion and exclusion of Q’s, full stops and brackets.
    • Positions sets the position of question text and code boxes relative to each other.
    • Response sets the response type of each question to either single, multiple, quantity, literal, date or time.
    • Show enables you to select which elements you wish to display on the questionnaire, and which you would like to hide.
    • Tabs specifies the relative spaces apportioned to individual elements within a question.

    The post Questionnaire topics: Customising questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Data entry tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/data-entry-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 17:30:44 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11044 The Data Entry Tailoring contains the default data entry settings for the current survey. It is split into three main areas: You can access the Data Entry Tailoring dialog by: Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop. Data Entry Option Description Default mode This is the default data entry mode […]

    The post Data entry tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Data Entry Tailoring contains the default data entry settings for the current survey. It is split into three main areas:

    • The way you enter data.
    • The date format and two digit date ranges.
    • The way data is verified.

    You can access the Data Entry Tailoring dialog by:

    • Clicking the Tailor | Data Entry menu item.
    • Opening the Data Entry window DataEntryIcon.png and clicking Tailor TailoringIcon.PNG .

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    Data Entry

    OptionDescription
    Default mode This is the default data entry mode shown when the Data Entry window opens. You can choose from Questionnaire, Interview or Prompted modes.
    Answer Questions There are two ways to enter the data. Continuously automatically moves to the next question for single responses. You need to press Enter to move on from Multiple, Literal, Date, Time or Quantity questions.
    Choose Individually to press Enter each time to move to the next question.
    Follow Question Routing Use the routing rules to skip over questions which are not applicable.
    Ignore Notes Skips over all Note type variables. Notes are not usually required in prompted mode but are needed in Questionnaire Mode and Interview Mode for CATI, CAPI and other questionnaires carried out using on-screen interviewing techniques.
    Allow No Replies No Reply values can be entered.
    Confirm No Replies You need to confirm No Reply is entered by confirming a warning message. This prevents accidental No Reply values being entered.
    Enforce max open length The entry for open-ended questions with a maximum length cannot exceed this maximum.
    Rotate Codes This rotates the order in which the codes of a question display. This is only suitable for online interviewing and for questions in which possible responses are read out to respondents.

    Dates

    OptionDescription
    Date formatChoose the default format for entering dates. The options are DD/MM/YYYY and MM/DD/YYYY.
    2 Digit YearsThis sets the default for any dates entered with a 2 digit years. For example with the range 1930 to 2029, the 2 digit year “30” will be treated as 1930.

    Verification

    OptionDescription
    Filter Enter a filter expression to reduce the response data to a smaller, specified group. For example, to verify the first 100 cases, specify filter CASE<=100.
    Selection Number of cases to be verified, which can be a number or a percentage. To verify all cases, enter 100% rather than the number of cases, then if more cases are added, they will automatically be verified, when required.
    Selection typeAt Random: Cases to be verified are chosen at random from those available after the filter and the selection have been applied.
    In Random Steps: Cases to be verified are chosen in case-number order at random intervals. For example, if 10% of 100 cases are to be verified in random steps the program will choose one case at random out of each group of ten, e.g. 5, 17, 21, etc.
    In Fixed Steps: Cases to be verified are chosen in case number order and at fixed intervals. For example if 10% of 100 cases are to be verified in fixed steps then cases 1, 11, 21, 31, 41, etc. will be chosen.
    Erroneous data Selects the response to replace the original data if a verification mismatch occurs.
    Remain Unchanged: This leaves any incorrect data as it is until you confirm the data. If an incorrect entry was made in a multi-punch field, it would remain as is for confirmation or alteration.
    Replaced by No Reply: This changes any incorrect data to No Reply until you confirm it.
    Ignore Literals This ignores all Literal Response variables during verification.
    Ignore paradata This ignores all paradata variables during verification.
    Paper Editions only The tailoring is only for paper editions of the questionnaire.

    The post Data entry tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Advanced tailoring: Content https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/advanced-tailoring-content/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:49:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11007 The Content tab shows settings for HTML publishing and images in all surveys. Option Description Modify file names to Select the case for the file names, Unchanged, Lower Case and Upper Case. NR in drop down Enter the display text that is used to show that there is no reply in a drop-down. JPEG Compression […]

    The post Advanced tailoring: Content appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Content tab shows settings for HTML publishing and images in all surveys.

    OptionDescription
    Modify file names to Select the case for the file names, Unchanged, Lower Case and Upper Case.
    NR in drop downEnter the display text that is used to show that there is no reply in a drop-down.
    JPEG CompressionSelect the percentage compression of JPEG images.
    PNG transparencyChoose the PNG images transparency, Masked or Blended.

    Other Advanced Tailoring options

    • Content with settings for HTML publishing and images.
    • Embedding with settings for using embedded data.
    • Updates with settings and details on the Snap XMP Desktop software updates.

    The post Advanced tailoring: Content appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Advanced tailoring: General https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/advanced-tailoring-general/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:49:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11005 These default settings apply to all the surveys used in Snap XMP Desktop. The General tab allows you to set the default settings for the way Snap XMP Desktop opens. Option Description Initial window to display Select the window that displays when you open a survey. The default is the Questionnaire window. You can also select None. […]

    The post Advanced tailoring: General appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    These default settings apply to all the surveys used in Snap XMP Desktop.

    The General tab allows you to set the default settings for the way Snap XMP Desktop opens.

    OptionDescription
    Initial window to display Select the window that displays when you open a survey. The default is the Questionnaire window. You can also select None.
    Default publicationSelect the default edition when you create a new survey.
    Separate code lists using Enter the text used between variables for text substitution with multiple variables. For example, “and” gives code1, code2 and code 3
    Auto generated label length This is the default length for code labels
    Don’t paste special unicode charactersWhen this is selected special Unicode characters will not be pasted in the Variables and Variable Details windows. This is on by default.
    Use colours in export to RTF Include colours when exporting to rich text format files
    Limit printed reports to a maximum number of pages This limits a printed report to a maximum number of pages, which is helpful for reports that contain many literal responses. The default is 500.

    Other Advanced tailoring options

    • Content with settings for HTML publishing and images.
    • Embedding with settings for using embedded data.
    • Updates with settings and details on the Snap XMP Desktop software updates.

    The post Advanced tailoring: General appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Advanced tailoring: Embedding https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/advanced-tailoring-embedding/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:48:45 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11009 The Embedding tab displays the embedded tailoring options. This specifies how the survey data is stored in the survey. If you are sharing a survey with a different Snap XMP user, you can reduce the file size by excluding objects which come with Snap XMP. Option Description Embed Automatically Choose whether data is embedded automatically, with options […]

    The post Advanced tailoring: Embedding appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Embedding tab displays the embedded tailoring options. This specifies how the survey data is stored in the survey. If you are sharing a survey with a different Snap XMP user, you can reduce the file size by excluding objects which come with Snap XMP.

    OptionDescription
    Embed AutomaticallyChoose whether data is embedded automatically, with options Never, New Objects and Always.
    Use Embedded DataChoose to use embedded data, Never, If File Missing or Always.
    ExportChoose to export embedded data, with options No Data, File Paths Only and All Embedded Data.

    Other Advanced Tailoring options

    • General with default system settings for all surveys.
    • Content with settings for HTML publishing and images.
    • Updates with settings and details on the Snap XMP Desktop software updates.

    The post Advanced tailoring: Embedding appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Advanced tailoring: Updates https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/advanced-tailoring-updates/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:48:27 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11012 In the Updates tab you can enable updates to automatically download when a new version is available. The Details section shows the update status. Other Advanced Tailoring options

    The post Advanced tailoring: Updates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In the Updates tab you can enable updates to automatically download when a new version is available. The Details section shows the update status.

    Other Advanced Tailoring options

    • General with default system settings for all surveys.
    • Content with settings for HTML publishing and images.
    • Embedding with settings for using embedded data.

    The post Advanced tailoring: Updates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Advanced tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/advanced-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:48:06 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10950 The Advanced Tailoring dialog contains advanced settings in four areas: You can open the Advanced Tailoring dialog using the Tailor | Advanced menu. Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    The post Advanced tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Advanced Tailoring dialog contains advanced settings in four areas:

    • General with default system settings for all surveys.
    • Content with settings for HTML publishing and images.
    • Embedding with settings for using embedded data.
    • Updates with settings and details on the Snap XMP Desktop software updates.

    You can open the Advanced Tailoring dialog using the Tailor | Advanced menu.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    The post Advanced tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Questionnaire design tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/questionnaire-design-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:47:47 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10944 These are the settings that give the default behaviour of the Questionnaire design window. You can open the dialog from the Tailor | Questionnaire Design menu. Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop. Smart mode switching These settings turn on shortcuts to switch quickly between Design mode and Style mode in the […]

    The post Questionnaire design tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    These are the settings that give the default behaviour of the Questionnaire design window. You can open the dialog from the Tailor | Questionnaire Design menu.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    QuestionDesign.PNG

    Smart mode switching

    These settings turn on shortcuts to switch quickly between Design mode and Style mode in the Questionnaire window.

    OptionDescription
    Switch to Design Mode when typingSelect to automatically change to Design mode from Style mode when you type.
    Switch to Design Mode by double-clickSelect to automatically change to Design mode from Style mode when you double-click.
    Switch to Style Mode by double-clickSelect to automatically change to Style mode from Design mode when you double-click.

    Smart style settings

    These settings default the behaviour for creating a new style when changes are made to a question.

    OptionDescription
    Favour style changes for font settingsIf whole field selected, change the style when you change a font.
    Prompt for extended style assignmentsSelect to open Extended Style assignments dialog if you re-apply a style to a changed version of that style. This allows changing the style to match the changes or over-writing the changes.

    Renumbering

    Automatically renumber questionnaireSelect to update the numbering so it runs in sequence if questions are re-ordered. Clear to keep the numbers as they are.

    Display options

    OptionDescription
    Mode and ColourSet the selection colour highlight for the specified mode.
    Expand dropdownsSelect to display all dropdown lists in full, uncheck to only display selected list.
    Hide boxes with dataSelect to conceal the box outline around data in Data View.

    Diagnose layout

    OptionDescription
    Show formatting marksDisplay space and paragraph markers.
    Show field borders Use dotted lines to show the edges of the question components.
    Underline fallback font If a specified character is not available in the selected font, underline the font used to display the character.
    Fallback InfoClick the Fallback Info button to view any fallback fonts that have been used to display any text.

    The post Questionnaire design tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Variable tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/variable-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:47:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10937 The Variable Tailoring dialog contains the default settings for the Variables and Variable Details windows. You can open the dialog from the Tailor | Variables menu or by clicking the Tailor icon on the toolbar in the Variables or Variable Details windows. Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop. Variable […]

    The post Variable tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Variable Tailoring dialog contains the default settings for the Variables and Variable Details windows. You can open the dialog from the Tailor | Variables menu or by clicking the Tailor icon TailoringIcon.PNG on the toolbar in the Variables or Variable Details windows.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    VariableTailor.PNG

    Variable order

    The Variable Order section selects the order that the Variables window displays the variables, by variable name or by the variable’s sequence number.

    OptionDescription
    NameSelect to display the variables in alphanumeric order by name.
    SequenceSelect to display the variables in ascending order of sequence number. When ordering by sequence, you can check the allocation of the sequence numbers.

    The Questionnaire window and Data Entry window display the variables by sequence number, so ordering by sequence displays the variables in the same order in the Variables window.

    Show overview columns

    The Show Overview Columns section contains options to add or remove content in the Variables window. The Variables window always shows the Name, Label, Type, Response and Codes columns.

    OptionDescription
    CountsSelect to display the response counts in the Variables window, which adds the columns: Sequence, Valid, No reply, Not asked and Errors.
    Routing and MaskingSelect to display the routing and masking columns in the Variables window, which adds the columns: Not Asked, Goto, Skipped by and Mask.
    Unique IdsSelect to display the variable id column in the Variables window, which adds the column Id.

    Show counts in details

    The Show Counts in Details section contains options to add or remove response counts in the Variable Details window. The Variable Details window loads more quickly when you do not display the counts, especially when there are a large number of responses.

    OptionDescription
    NeverDoes not display the counts, which is the best option for large surveys. The routing is displayed in the Not Asked column when this option is selected.
    If variable is activeCounts will be displayed if the selected variable is already active (showing counts). 
    AlwaysAlways displays a count of data responses for each code, if available.
    Show code valuesDisplays code values in brackets next to the values in the Code list.

    Save options

    The table shows the buttons to save or cancel changes in the tailoring dialog.

    OptionDescription
    KeepKeep or save the changes as part of the current survey.
    Use Uses the changes for the duration of the session. The setting reverts to the original settings after closing the survey.
    Cancel Cancel any changes and close the dialog.

    The post Variable tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Reference tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/reference-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:46:49 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10948 The reference tailoring allows you to specify: The Reference tailoring is available by clicking the Tailor | Reference menu. Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop. Topic language The Reference window displays the topic names in the preferred topic language. This is the same for all language versions. The options […]

    The post Reference tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The reference tailoring allows you to specify:

    • the language used to display the topic names
    • how the preview pane appears

    The Reference tailoring is available by clicking the Tailor | Reference menu.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    reftailor.PNG

    Topic language

    The Reference window displays the topic names in the preferred topic language. This is the same for all language versions.

    The options are:

    • Automatic, where the topic name appears in the same language as the variables within the topic. You can set this on the Reference window toolbar.
    • A language in the SurveyPak, where the topic name always appears in the specified language.

    Preview Pane

    You can specify how the selected variable is shown in the Preview pane.
    The options are:

    • Not scaled, appears as the same size and proportions as it appears in the Questionnaire window.
    • Scaled to fit window, appears in the same proportions as it appears in the Questionnaire window, but scaled to fit in the preview pane.
    • Scaled if too wide, appears in the same proportions as it appears in the Questionnaire window, but only scaled if too wide to appear in the preview pane.
    • Drawn to fit window, appears as the same size as it would in the Questionnaire window, but with proportions suitable to the preview pane.

    The post Reference tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Analysis variables tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analysis-variables-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:46:32 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10946 The Analysis Variables Tailoring dialog provides settings which control the overall presentation of analyses and dictate how missing data is to be handled. The Analysis Variables Tailoring dialog is available by clicking the Tailoring | Analysis Variables menu. Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop. Tailoring options Option Description Results Set to the […]

    The post Analysis variables tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Analysis Variables Tailoring dialog provides settings which control the overall presentation of analyses and dictate how missing data is to be handled.

    The Analysis Variables Tailoring dialog is available by clicking the Tailoring | Analysis Variables menu.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/an_var_tail.png

    Tailoring options

    OptionDescription
    Results Set to the number of significant figures used in the results
    Percentages Set to the number of decimal places used to display percentages
    Calculations Set to the number of significant figures used in calculations
    % Sign Select to display the percentage (%) signs
    Exclude case Completely exclude a case if one of its variable responses is missing
    Substitute mean If a case has a missing variable response, substitute the mean of the other valid responses to the variable

    Save options

    The table shows the buttons used to save or cancel changes in the tailoring dialog.

    OptionDescription
    Keep Apply the tailoring and keep it as the default setting for the current survey.
    Use Use the changes only for the duration of the session. The setting reverts to the original settings when the dialog is closed.
    RestoreCancel changes but leave the dialog open.
    Cancel Cancel changes and close the dialog.

    The post Analysis variables tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Reports tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/reports-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:46:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10939 The Reports Tailoring dialog sets the defaults used to export the report to a printer or file. If exporting to a file, you can import the results into a spreadsheet or other available file type. The Reports Tailoring dialog is available from the Tailoring | Reports menu. Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap […]

    The post Reports tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Reports Tailoring dialog sets the defaults used to export the report to a printer or file. If exporting to a file, you can import the results into a spreadsheet or other available file type.

    The Reports Tailoring dialog is available from the Tailoring | Reports menu.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    ReportTailor.PNG

    Tailoring options

    OptionDescription
    Reports will be output to Printer: Send the report to the printer in the specified layout
    Export: Write the report to a file of the specified format and in the specified directory
    Page Details Open the Page Setup dialog to specify how the report will be printed.
    File Details Open the File Details dialog to specify how the report files will be numbered, and whether the data will be appended or overwritten
    Export file type Specify the format of the file required by the package that you are exporting.

    Save options

    The table shows the buttons to save or cancel changes in the tailoring dialog.

    OptionDescription
    Keep Keep or save the changes as part of the current survey.
    Use Use the changes only for the duration of the session. The setting revert to the original settings when the dialog is closed.
    Cancel Cancel any changes and close the dialog.

    The post Reports tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Spellings tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/spellings-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:45:57 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10941 Spell checking is essential to make sure that the text throughout your survey is accurate. The spell checking settings determine how the text is spell checked in each survey. They are set in the Spell Checker Options dialog, which is accessible from the Tailor | Spelling menu in Snap XMP Desktop. Tailoring survey settings are […]

    The post Spellings tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Spell checking is essential to make sure that the text throughout your survey is accurate. The spell checking settings determine how the text is spell checked in each survey. They are set in the Spell Checker Options dialog, which is accessible from the Tailor | Spelling menu in Snap XMP Desktop.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/spl_chk_opt.png

    Spelling options

    OptionDescription
    Always suggest corrections Always check text and suggest possible correct spellings from the selected dictionaries.
    Suggest from main dictionaries only Check text from the main dictionaries selected and ignore the custom dictionary
    Ignore words in UPPERCASE Do not spell check words that are all capitals or uppercase letters.
    Ignore words with numbers Do not spell check words that include digits, e.g. frog1, rel8.
    Ignore internet and file addresses Do not spell check word combinations that look like file path names or internet addresses

    Custom dictionary

    A further dictionary, named “Custom.dic” is provided with Snap XMP Desktop. The custom dictionary stores the user’s own library of regularly used words that may not appear in the standard dictionaries. You can also create further specialist dictionaries to keep organisation-specific or industry-specific words in their own dictionary.

    Click the Dictionaries button from the Custom dictionary section. This opens the Custom Dictionaries dialog.

    • Click New to create a new custom dictionary and Remove to delete the selected custom dictionary
    • Click Edit to add words to the selected custom dictionary.
    • Click OK to save the changes.

    Main dictionaries

    Snap XMP Desktop comes with 13 standard dictionaries covering a range of different languages. The Main dictionaries section contains the list of standard dictionaries. During spell checking, if the standard dictionaries do not contain the word, then the spell check searches the custom dictionary. If the word is valid, then you can add it to the custom dictionary for future use.

    Click the Dictionaries button from the Main dictionary section. This opens the Main Dictionaries dialog, where you can select additional standard dictionaries or add an extra language dictionary.

    The post Spellings tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adding a CAPTCHA style question https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-a-captcha-style-question/ Thu, 16 Nov 2023 09:53:52 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10755 CAPTCHA is a term that stands for Completely Automated Public Turing Test to Tell Computers and Humans Apart. It is a type of challenge-response test that is used to determine whether the user of a website or online service is a human or a bot. CAPTCHAs are designed to be easy for humans to solve, […]

    The post Adding a CAPTCHA style question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    CAPTCHA is a term that stands for Completely Automated Public Turing Test to Tell Computers and Humans Apart. It is a type of challenge-response test that is used to determine whether the user of a website or online service is a human or a bot. CAPTCHAs are designed to be easy for humans to solve, but hard for bots and other malicious software to figure out. By using CAPTCHAs, websites can prevent spam, abuse, and automated attacks from bots.

    Some examples of CAPTCHAs are:

    • A checkbox that says, “I’m not a robot”.
    • A set of images that the user has to select based on a given criteria (e.g., select all the traffic lights).
    • A distorted text or audio that the user must type or speak.
    • A mathematical equation or a logic puzzle that the user must solve.

    This help page shows you how to create a CAPTCHA , by adding a mathematical calculation image to your survey, which will automatically show a different image based on the time that the participant starts the survey. However, you can create a CAPTCHA that can change at different rates or using different criteria. We have supplied you with various images to allow for an image change every five seconds. The calculation can be as complex as you require.

    The CAPTCHA works best at the start or end of the survey. We recommend that the CAPTCHA is displayed on a separate page, using a page break.

    Please note:

    • CAPTCHA is not currently available on text only accessible surveys where the strict rules and no dynamic content are set.
    • This CAPTCHA option does not detect bots, however it may slow them down.

    Downloading the sample CAPTCHA images

    To help use a CAPTCHA in your survey we have provided some sample images.

    Download the sample CAPTCHA images here: captcha-images.zip

    Example CAPTCHA style question

    Create the derived variable

    1. Once you have created your survey, you will need to create a derived variable based on the ID.start paradata variable.
    2. Select the Variables icon on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar.
    3. Click on the New Variable button
    4. Give the variable the name ‘time’.
    5. Select the Type as Derived and the Response as Single.
    6. In the Code list, add the following, with each on a separate line:
      • Label ‘1’ and Value ‘ID.start second<16’
      • Label ‘2’ and Value ‘ID.start second<31’
      • Label ‘3’ and Value ‘ID.start second<46’
      • Label ‘4’ and Value ‘true’
    1. Save the derived variable and return to the Questionnaire design window.

    Add the CAPTCHA images

    1. In the Questionnaire design window, add four Open Ended style questions at the start or end of the questionnaire.
    2. In each of the questions, add a conditionally asked routing rule based on each code label in the derived variable. For example, in the first question set time = 1, the second question set time = 2 and so on.
    1. To insert the CAPTCHA image, place the cursor in the question text area of the first Open Ended question then click the Insert | Image menu.
    2. Enter the image file name or click Browse to select the image file. Set the Zoom and Alt Text as required. Click OK.
    3. Repeat this for each question, inserting a different CAPTCHA image for each question. This example uses four of the calculation images.
    4. On each of the Open Ended questions make sure the following are set in the Questionnaire Properties
      • Must Answer set to Yes
      • Box Scaling set to Fixed
      • Valid set to the answer to the image question.
    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated
    1. Change the position of the Open Ended box so that is next to the calculation image.
      • Click on Positions from the second drop down box.
      • Change the Question to Beside.
    1. Save the changes to the questionnaire.

    Invalid CAPTCHA during the interview

    If the wrong answer is given, a warning is shown to alert the respondent that they need to re-enter the CAPTCHA response.

    The post Adding a CAPTCHA style question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using Google fonts in a survey https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/installing-google-fonts-in-survey/ Tue, 14 Nov 2023 13:56:55 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10742 Google Fonts are open source and you can use them in any non-commercial or commercial project. They are free to use in your surveys. Find out more at: Google Fonts Frequently Asked Questions. Finding the Google Font Using the Google Font in a survey After you have installed the Google Font, you can use it […]

    The post Using Google fonts in a survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Google Fonts are open source and you can use them in any non-commercial or commercial project. They are free to use in your surveys. Find out more at: Google Fonts Frequently Asked Questions.

    Finding the Google Font

    1. Search Google Fonts or enter “https://fonts.google.com/” in your web browser. This page shows a list of available fonts with example text showing how the font looks.
    2. Once you have found your desired font, click on the font to see all the different styles, for example, bold or italic. Click ‘Download Family’, found in the upper right-hand corner. This will download the font file to the downloads area on your device.
    3. Install the fonts on your device. This is dependent on the device’s operating system and your organisation’s security procedures.
    4. Select the appropriate font style by clicking on the Select option on the right of the font (in this case we have used Roboto Condensed Regular 400)

    Using the Google Font in a survey

    After you have installed the Google Font, you can use it in your surveys.

    1. In Snap XMP Desktop, open the survey in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select the Style Mode icon .
    3. Select All Styles from the first drop down menu.

    .

    1. Select Font from the second dropdown.
    2. Select (All) from the third dropdown.
    3. Replace the font in the fourth dropdown to the desired font. This will replace the font for all the text in the survey.

    Linking the Google Font for interviewing

    1. In your web browser, open Google Fonts again and select the View Selected Fonts icon in the upper right-hand corner of the page. (This may also be called View Selected Families with a different icon in the upper right-hand corner.)
    2. A new panel will appear, copy the Use on the Web text, making sure the <link> option is selected.
    1. In Snap XMP Desktop, open the survey in the Questionnaire window in Design mode. You need to add the Google Font using a custom html field at the beginning of your logo.
    2. Insert the cursor at the start of your logo.
    3. Right click then select Insert|HTML Field from the pop-up menu.
    4. Select Custom HTML.
    5. Paste the code from Google Fonts in the HTML field.
    6. Click OK.

    If you have different logos or title fields on each edition, you will need to repeat this for each edition.

    Questionnaire Design View

    The Questionnaire design view of your survey should look like this:

    Save your survey and upload to Snap XMP Online.

    Remember to check all editions of the questionnaire where you want the new font to be used.

    Interviewing with the Google Font

    Your online survey should appear with the Google Fonts.

    The post Using Google fonts in a survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Question Styles https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/question-styles/ Thu, 13 Jul 2023 13:08:32 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=9565 Snap XMP comes with an extensive number of question styles that you can use in your questionnaire design. Sample survey showing Snap XMP question styles To help you design your questionnaire we have created a survey explaining all the question types and letting you see how they look in an interview. This survey gives an […]

    The post Question Styles appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Snap XMP comes with an extensive number of question styles that you can use in your questionnaire design.

    Sample survey showing Snap XMP question styles

    To help you design your questionnaire we have created a survey explaining all the question types and letting you see how they look in an interview. This survey gives an example of each question type available in Snap XMP. You can select the question types that you are interested or view the survey in full.

    Links to help on question styles

    The post Question Styles appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using placeholder text https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-placeholder-text/ Tue, 10 Jan 2023 11:14:43 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=8522 Placeholder text, also known as ghost text, lets you display initial text which describes the expected type of response. This helps the respondent reply to the question with relevant information. Once a respondent starts entering text in the question box, then this removes the placeholder text. Placeholder text is available for all open-ended questions. Adding […]

    The post Using placeholder text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Placeholder text, also known as ghost text, lets you display initial text which describes the expected type of response. This helps the respondent reply to the question with relevant information. Once a respondent starts entering text in the question box, then this removes the placeholder text. Placeholder text is available for all open-ended questions.

    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated

    Adding placeholder text

    1. Select the open-ended question in the questionnaire.
    2. Select Show from the second dropdown.
    1. Select Placeholder in the third drop-down then select the Show checkbox. This enables the from drop-down.
    2. Select the label that will provide the placeholder text.
    3. If the label is visible, select the label and enter the placeholder text.
    4. If the label is hidden, click the Variable Properties icon on the Questionnaire toolbar. This opens the Variable Properties dialog. Enter the placeholder text in the Value column for the selected label. Click OK.
    Graphical user interface, table

Description automatically generated

    The placeholder text is shown in a light grey color.

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Using placeholders in an interview

    In an interview the question shows the placeholder text as it is displayed in the Questionnaire design window.

    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated

    When the respondent enters the first character in the text box then the placeholder text is removed and replaced with the respondent’s response.

    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated

    The post Using placeholder text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inline questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inline-questions/ Wed, 19 Oct 2022 14:04:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=8188 Inline questions are questions that can be inserted into any text in the questionnaire. As with other types of questions, inline questions use the variable properties, such as setting the response type and adding a pattern to validate the response. You can also show or hide them using routing. Using inline questions can give the […]

    The post Inline questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inline questions are questions that can be inserted into any text in the questionnaire. As with other types of questions, inline questions use the variable properties, such as setting the response type and adding a pattern to validate the response. You can also show or hide them using routing. Using inline questions can give the questionnaire the flexibility to create forms, providing areas where the respondent can enter information.

    Graphical user interface, application, Teams

Description automatically generated

    All the questions included as inline questions must be created before they can be used in an Inline Question field. Inserting an Inline Question field to any text in the questionnaire creates an inline question. When an Inline Question field is created, it is shown in the questionnaire as the variable name inside double angled brackets << >>, for example, <<Q1.1>>. During the live interview, the inline question is displayed so that the respondent is shown the inline question instead of the placeholder seen in the questionnaire design window.

    Setting up the questions

    When setting up the questions, you need to create a main question then create a number of subsequent questions that will become the inline questions. In the example used in these instructions, the main question is a multi-choice question which asks the respondent to supply further information, when a selection is made, using inline questions.

    1. Open the survey in the Questionnaire design window.
    2. Click New Question to add a new question in the questionnaire.
    3. In the question style menu, select Multi Choice.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. In the area marked “Click here for text”, enter the question text. For example, “How did you find out about us?”
    2. Press the Tab key and the cursor moves into the first code label. Enter the first of your answer codes. Press Tab to create and move to the next answer code. Continue with the text for the other code labels and press Tab after each one.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Next, create two Other style questions for use as the inline questions. Make sure there are no page breaks between the main question and the inline questions.
    2. Click New Question to create the first Other question. In this example, the question name is set to Q1.1 using a naming convention that helps to show these questions are grouped together.
    3. In the question style menu, select Other. Enter the text “which channel?”
    4. Click New Question to create the second Other question.
    5. In the question style menu, select Other. Enter the text “which site?”
    A picture containing table

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Save   to save the changes made to the questionnaire.

    Inline questions with routing

    When you add routing to the inline questions, it only shows, during the live interview, if the answer is selected.

    1. Select the Other question “which channel?” and click Routing Rules on the Questionnaire window toolbar to set up the routing.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Add to create a new routing rule.
    2. In Type, select Conditionally Ask Question and click OK.
    New routing instruction
    1. The Routing Rules dialog expands and fills with information. (You can also see this by clicking Details>> on the Routing Rules dialog and hide it by clicking Details<<.)
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. In the If box. Enter the routing condition. In this example, “Q1=2”. The “2” refers to code 2 (Radio Ad) of Q1.
    2. Click OK to save the routing rule.
    3. Repeat the process for the second inline question “which site?”.

    Inserting Inline Question variable fields

    1. Position the cursor in the text at the location where you require the inline question.
    Diagram

Description automatically generated
    1. Check that the Topic drop-down is Font which shows the Insert button.
    1. Click the Insert button and select Variable Field from the menu. This displays the New variable field dialog.
    1. Complete the fields to define the dynamic text:
      • The Variable list contains all the variables and paradata for the questionnaire. Select the variable to insert from the list.
      • In Aspect, select Inline Question.
      • In Modify case, choose the case used to display the text: Normal, UPPER CASE, lower case, Sentence case, Title Case.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click OK. The question number is displayed inside double angled brackets, e.g., <<Q1.1>>, this will be replaced by the inline question when a respondent is answering the questionnaire.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Save   to save the changes made to the questionnaire.
    2. You can test the inline questions by publishing the survey and launching a preview in Snap XMP Online or Snap XMP Desktop.

    During the live interview the Inline Question is displayed in the question.

    Graphical user interface, application, Teams

Description automatically generated

    Formatting inline questions

    Inline questions use the formatting of the question, at the point of insertion of the Inline Question variable field.

    This is shown in the following example where the question asking, “which channel?” is shown in blue with a larger font size, but the Inline Question variable field is shown in a smaller, red font.

    When the question is formatted in an interview the inline question is shown in the smaller, red font using the Inline Question variable field formatting. This results in an inline question that integrates with the question text.

    As a result, the inline question may lose any of the original text formatting, such as, bold, italic, colour and size.

    The inline questions may also have their controls, such as boxes and text boxes resized for a better integration with the surrounding text or questions.

    Example 1: Creating a form using inline questions

    In this example, an instruction question contains three inline questions requesting personal details from the respondent.

    The inline questions are provided by the three following questions: an open-ended question asking for the respondent’s name, a drop down asking for gender and another open-ended question asking for their email address.

    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated

    During the interview the demographic questions are inserted into the instruction question providing the inline question format.

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Example 2: Creating a conversational style form

    Inline questions can also be used in a conversational style form with the inline questions included as part of the text rather than formatted underneath each other.

    The inline questions are provided by the same three following questions: an open-ended question asking for the respondent’s name, a drop down asking for gender and another open-ended question asking for their email address. These questions are positioned to follow on after each other rather than underneath each other as in a standard form.

    Graphical user interface, text

Description automatically generated

    During the interview the demographic questions are inserted into the instruction question providing the inline question format.

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Example 3: Creating calculations as the respondent answers questions

    Another use is to create calculated inline questions to build up results as the respondent answers questions.

    In this example, the respondent is asked how much they spend on different categories and the total spend is calculated as well as the percentage of that total that each represents.

    Table

Description automatically generated

    During the interview the total spend and percentages are calculated as the respondent fills in their answers.

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Example 4: Creating forms that ask for parts of a date separately

    Use inline questions to ask for the day, month and year parts of a date separately.

    Inline questions are set up for different parts of a date separately. These are used in an instruction to ask for the respondent’s date of birth.

    Graphical user interface, text

Description automatically generated with medium confidence

    During the interview the date questions are inserted into the instruction question providing the inline question format.

    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inline questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Compound Grids https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/compound-grids/ Thu, 22 Sep 2022 09:41:49 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=8032 A compound grid combines multiple grids into a single grid. This allows a grid to contain different question styles such as single choice, multiple choice and open series. With this feature, you can create grids with rows that allow the respondent to select a choice, then add associated comments, dates, times or amounts, as part […]

    The post Compound Grids appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    A compound grid combines multiple grids into a single grid. This allows a grid to contain different question styles such as single choice, multiple choice and open series. With this feature, you can create grids with rows that allow the respondent to select a choice, then add associated comments, dates, times or amounts, as part of the response.

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    To combine the grids into a compound grid, they must:

    • follow each other in the questionnaire
    • not have page breaks between the grids
    • contain the same number of questions or rows
    • contain grids or open series. These are the question styles Grid First, Grid Next and Open Series First, Open Series Next or styles that are based on them.
    • have the same Show settings for Space before and Line before

    Create the first grid

    The first grid or open series question sets the questions that are used for each row. You can add question text in subsequent grids but when they are combined in the compound grid only the question text from the first grid will be shown.

    In this example, a Grid First question starts the compound grid.

    1. Click New Question to add a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Grid First. This will allow you to set up the headings for the first of a series of grid questions.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. In the area marked Click here for text, enter your question text, for example “Please tell us about your experience today.”
    2. Press the Tab key on your keyboard and enter the first answer, such as “Good”. Press Tab to create the next code and enter each subsequent answer. After the last code press the Down arrow  Down Arrow  instead of Tab.
    3. The cursor will move to the text of the first Grid Label. Type the first item, such as “Coffee Shop” and press Tab.
    4. This creates the next grid row automatically changing the style to Grid Next for the second and subsequent rows. Enter the next Grid Label.
    Table

Description automatically generated
    1. Press Tab to create another grid row or press Enter to complete the grid and move to a new question.

    Create subsequent grids

    Create the other grids that form part of the compound grid in the same way. Multiple grids can be added to the compound grid, but consideration should be given to the layout of the questionnaire.

    When adding the grids make sure there are no page breaks between them.

    In this example, an open series question asks the respondents how much they spent.

    1. Click New Question to add a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Open Series First. This will allow you to set up the heading for the first of a series of questions, each of which can contain numbers or text.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. In the area marked Click here for text, enter your question text.
    2. Press Tab and enter the text for the first row.
    3. Press Tab. and enter the text for the next row. This automatically changes the style to Open Series Next for the second and subsequent rows.
    4. Press Tab. and enter the text for the next row. This automatically changes the style to Open Next for the second and subsequent rows.
    5. If you need more questions press Tab again and repeat the process.
    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated with medium confidence
    1. If you wish to change the response type, select Response in the toolbar and select the response type. In this example, the response type is Quantity. Any following questions will keep the new response type.
    A picture containing graphical user interface

Description automatically generated

    Combine the grids

    The next step is to combine the grids and open series questions to create the compound grid.

    1. If you do not want the question number showing across the compound grid, remove the question numbers on the grids by selecting Show and clearing the Show option for the Name.
    A picture containing arrow

Description automatically generated
    1. Select the first row of the second or subsequent grid.
    2. In the menu, select Columns from the second drop-down.
    3. Click the Compound button to set this grid as part of the compound grid. The display of the grids in the Questionnaire design window will not change.
    Graphical user interface, text, table

Description automatically generated
    1. Repeat this for any further consecutive grids that are part of the compound grid.

    When this compound grid appears in a live interview, the open series question (Q2) displays adjacent to the grid question (Q1).

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Adjusting the proportional width used by each grid

    By default, the grids within the compound grid are automatically spaced across the web page. You can adjust the width of each grid set up in the compound grid.

    After you have set up the compound grid, you can set the widths in the Questionnaire design window.

    1. Select the grid in the questionnaire.
    2. Select ‘Compound’ in the toolbar and you then have the option to specify whether the grid is the starting point for a compound grid or whether it continues to be a part.
    1. To turn the setting off, you can select the option Not a compound grid. This is the setting shown if the grid question is not part of a compound grid.
    2. The sizing defaults to Auto. With this setting, the grid width is automatically calculated during the live interview.
    3. To set the proportional width, clear the Auto checkbox. This displays a percentage width the grid will use. Enter the percentage required.
    4. Repeat this for each grid set up in the compound grid.
    5. Test that the compound grid display in the required way by previewing the questionnaire.

    If one of the grids is set to auto, and the other grids have a percentage specified, then the automatically sized grid is displayed with the minimum size required. The other grids will be displayed in the specified ratio across the rest of the available page width.

    If you set the combined percentages to more than 100%, Snap XMP Desktop will set them in the ratio they are specified in. For example, if you have 3 grids and you set them all to 50%, Snap XMP Desktop will set them to around 33% each.

    Different Editions

    In a survey that has multiple editions you will need to consider how the layout of the questionnaire will look for each edition during the live interview.

    You must set up the compound grid for each edition. Editions used for smaller screens such as for a phone or tablet may not be suitable for larger compound grids.

    Customising the compound grid

    The appearance of each grid or open series can be customised individually. When the grids are combined in a compound grid, each grid is displayed with its own styling, including fonts, colours and background.

    If you want to create a uniform grid with the same styling, customise each grid in the same way. Creating a question style for the compound grid helps make sure that all the grids have the same appearance.

    If you want each section of the grid to be distinct then style each grid as required.

    Please note: The line spacing settings given by Space before and Line before (found in the Show option) must be the same for all grids regardless of styling.

    Testing the compound grid

    The compound grid does not show in the Questionnaire design window, only the individual grids are available.

    When you test the compound grid appearance, publish the questionnaire as a preview. In Snap XMP Desktop, more information is available at Testing the questionnaire online and in Snap XMP Online more information is available in the Previewing the published survey section in Publishing your survey.

    Please note: The compound grids are only available with the new interviewer. If the grids are not showing as a compound grid, make sure you are using the new interviewer. You can check this in the Questionnaire properties. Select the Interview section and click the Advanced button then clear both interview settings.

    The post Compound Grids appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Question carousels https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/question-carousels/ Thu, 30 Jun 2022 10:33:50 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7809 A carousel is another way of displaying a question that contains a number of rows, such as a grid or semantic scale. Each row is presented as a card showing the question and the respondent answers the card shown before moving onto the next one. The carousel can be set to move onto the next […]

    The post Question carousels appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    A carousel is another way of displaying a question that contains a number of rows, such as a grid or semantic scale. Each row is presented as a card showing the question and the respondent answers the card shown before moving onto the next one. The carousel can be set to move onto the next question automatically or manually by clicking navigation buttons. The respondent can navigate through all the cards to review their answers. There is also an option to show the count out of the total number of aspects to answer.

    This question style is especially useful to present larger grids on smaller screens, such as smartphones and tablets, as the respondent only sees one question row at a time. This can also be helpful to ensure that a question row isn’t missed in a large grid as the rows are shown one at a time.

    In Snap XMP Desktop, grid and semantic scale questions can be displayed in a carousel format. The question carousels are available for all online editions. The question remains displayed in the grid format in the questionnaire design but is shown as a carousel when run in a web browser as a preview or a live interview. The carousel appearance can be changed by setting the font, background colours and box style.

    There is also a video introducing the question carousel at Question Carousel from Snap Surveys on Vimeo.

    Creating a question carousel

    The questionnaire must contain a grid or semantic scale question that can be shown as a question carousel.

    1. In the Questionnaire design window, select the Grid First or Semantic Scale First question.
    2. Select Show in the Toolbar Topic list
    3. Select As Carousel in the next drop-down menu and check the Show box. The question appearance does not change in the questionnaire design.
    A picture containing calendar

Description automatically generated
    1. Click the Options button to show the 2 settings:
      • Select automatically display to set the next question to display automatically when the respondent has selected an answer for the current question.
      • Select show count to show the current question row being answered out of the total number of questions in the carousel
    2. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each online edition, as required, in the questionnaire.
    3. Click Save to save the changes to the questionnaire.

    Note that is advised that grids that display as a dropdown, which is often the case in phone and tablet editions, are changed to the standard grid box format before converting to a question carousel.

    Testing the question carousel

    The grid or semantic scale question appearance does not change when the question is changed to the carousel style. To test that the question carousel is shown in the required format you will need to publish the questionnaire in preview mode.

    1. Click Publish icon on the Questionnaire toolbar.
    2. In Method, select Preview only then click the Publish button. This launches a test version of the questionnaire in a web browser.
    3. Check that the question carousel behaves as expected.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Changing the carousel appearance

    The appearance of the carousel can be changed in the same way as other questions. You can change:

    • Background color of the carousel cards
    • Font of the question, grid label and box text
    • Box style of the answers
    • Show images instead of text

    Changing the background

    The background colour of the carousel cards is determined by the background colour of the grid label.

    1. In the Questionnaire design window, select the rows of the grid or semantic scale question.
    2. Select Background in the Toolbar Topic list.
    3. Select Grid label in the next drop-down menu.
    4. Click the Color button and choose a background colour then click OK
    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated with medium confidence
    1. Click Publish icon on the Questionnaire toolbar.
    2. In Method, select Preview only then click the Publish button. This launches a test version of the questionnaire in a web browser. Note that the colour of the cards is the same as the background color of the grid label.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated with medium confidence

    Changing the font

    1. Select the grid label then select Font in the Toolbar Topic list.
    2. Select the font options for the text.
    3. Repeat for each grid label, as required.
    A picture containing graphical user interface

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Publish icon on the Questionnaire toolbar.
    2. In Method, select Preview only then click the Publish button. This launches a test version of the questionnaire in a web browser. Note that the text of the cards uses the font set for the grid label.
    A picture containing chat or text message

Description automatically generated

    Changing the box style

    1. In the Questionnaire design window, select the rows of the grid or semantic scale question.
    2. Select Boxes in the Toolbar Topic list.
    3. Select Images in the next drop-down menu.
    4. Click the Images button and choose a box style then click OK
    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated with medium confidence
    1. Click Publish icon on the Questionnaire toolbar.
    2. In Method, select Preview only then click the Publish button. This launches a test version of the questionnaire in a web browser. Note that the answer selection options under the carousel cards use the box style.
    A picture containing diagram

Description automatically generated

    Inserting an image on the carousel cards

    1. Select the grid label then select Font in the Toolbar Topic list.
    2. Click Insert then select Image.
    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated with low confidence
    1. Browse to the image and click OK.
    2. Repeat for each grid label, as required.
    3. Click Publish icon on the Questionnaire toolbar.
    4. In Method, select Preview only then click the Publish button. This launches a test version of the questionnaire in a web browser. Note that the card image is used from the grid label.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Question carousels appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Variable properties https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/variable-properties/ Mon, 21 Mar 2022 11:39:47 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7494 All questions in a questionnaire are a form of variable. When you create a question in Design mode you create a variable used in all editions of the survey. Showing variable properties in the Questionnaire window Each variable has a set of individual properties. The properties depend on the type of question. You can examine and change […]

    The post Variable properties appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    All questions in a questionnaire are a form of variable. When you create a question in Design mode you create a variable used in all editions of the survey.

    Showing variable properties in the Questionnaire window

    1. Each variable has a set of individual properties. The properties depend on the type of question. You can examine and change the properties when you are in Design mode   in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select one or more questions.
    3. Click   to display the Variable Properties dialog box, or right-click and select Variable Properties from the context menu
    4. The Variable Properties dialog will be displayed
    Variable Properties dialog
    1. You can then edit the property values. If you have selected several questions of the same type, you can change any properties they share.

    Properties for all questions

    Property

    Description

    Name

    Name of the variable you currently have selected, for example: Q1

    Lock Name

    When set to Yes this stops the variable being renumbered

    Label

    This is a full description of the variable that will appear in the data entry and on all analysis reports. By default, this displays the editable variable grid label in grids and semantic scales or as the question text in other question styles.

    Text

    Displays the editable question text

    Response

    Response types shown will depend on the question style selected. The response will determine the number of replies that are possible and the way in which they are recorded when data entry is completed. Single: allow only one answer to be selected Multiple: allow more than one answer Quantity: accept numerical answers Date: accept suitable date formats, e.g., dd/mm/yy Time: accept suitable time formats, e.g., 2.30pm Literal: allow any text

    Must answer

    Yes forces this question to be asked during data entry. No allows the question to be kept blank

    Not asked

    Not Asked conditions are set to assist with the routing in a questionnaire and with survey analysis, by excluding certain categories of respondents

    Initial value

    A default value that will be displayed during the interview or data entry. If read only is set then this can be an expression defining a calculated value.

    Read only

    When set to Yes, prevents the respondents from setting the answer

    Aria role

    Assign a custom role to the question in the published output to improve accessibility

    Properties for closed questions only

    Property

    Description

    Code count

    The number of codes in the variable.

    Ordering

    Select the ordering method to use when rotating codes or grid as data is being entered. Only applies to questions with a fixed list of responses.

    Inverse: question codes alternate between each case in normal and reverse order

    Forward: codes appear in the same order but always start forward one

    Random: codes appear in a random order

    Alphabetic: codes appear in alphabetical order

    Ordering exclude

    Specify the codes that are excluded from ordering. When ordering, the selected codes will always be moved to the end of the list.

    Ordinal

    An ordinal question is a single response question where the answer codes form a sequence. Set to Yes to preserve the order of the question.

    Mask

    Specifies which codes are visible according to previous responses.

    Auto answer

    Automatically answer a masked multi-choice question: if only one response is possible, or if the number of responses available is less than the value set for Min.

    Properties for multi-response questions only

    Property

    Description

    Rating check

    Yes set each grid row or semantic scale entry to accept only one answer. No allows multiple answers per row.

    Min

    Minimum number of codes which respondents have to select before moving onto the next question. The default for Min is 0. If Min is not 0, an error message is shown if a respondent leaves the question blank.

    Max

    Maximum number of codes which can be selected. Default is the number of codes in the question.

    Exclusive

    Specify which codes can only be selected on their own (e.g., Don’t know).

    Properties for open questions only

    Property

    Description

    Max data length

    Maximum number of characters in response.

    Decimal places

    (Quantity responses) Number of decimal places used in analysis (apply a whole number pattern to stop decimal places being entered)

    Box Scaling

    Set to Scaled to make the box length proportional to width of the column or page the box is in. Set to Fixed to fix the length as Box Length. This is the equivalent of Fixed and Proportional on the topic toolbar.

    Box Length

    Length of box given in character spaces if there is no box scaling.

    Box width (%)

    Percentage of column used for box if there is box scaling.

    Box rows

    The number of rows in the open ended answer area.

    Valid

    Range of valid responses (e.g., 0 to 99).

    Pattern

    Defines possible valid ways for the data to be entered.

    Scanning validation

    (Scanning only) Select the validation type for scanning.

    The post Variable properties appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Selecting the language in a multi-lingual questionnaire using the map control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/selecting-language-using-map-control/ Thu, 17 Feb 2022 16:58:31 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7333 When running a multi-lingual survey, you want to make it easy for the respondent to select the language before starting to answer the questions. This can be achieved using images associated with the languages, such as flags. In Snap XMP, a survey can use multiple languages. An edition is created for each language added to […]

    The post Selecting the language in a multi-lingual questionnaire using the map control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    When running a multi-lingual survey, you want to make it easy for the respondent to select the language before starting to answer the questions. This can be achieved using images associated with the languages, such as flags.

    In Snap XMP, a survey can use multiple languages. An edition is created for each language added to the survey.

    In Snap XMP, the map control can be used to allow the respondent to answer a question, or in this case, to choose a language by selecting an image.

    Blank multi-lingual survey templates supplied with Snap XMP

    Snap XMP is supplied with a multi-lingual survey template that already has a language edition built into them. The supplied survey templates differ by location and, at present, include:

    • Blank Template with Welsh Edition in UK
    • Blank Template with Spanish Edition in US
    • Blank Template with French Edition in US
    • Blank Template with French Edition in Canada
    • Blank Template with Dutch Edition in Europe
    • Blank Template with Spanish Edition in Europe
    • Blank Template with Dutch and French Edition in Europe

    These are available in the Reference SurveyPak provided in each region.

    Creating a survey using the Blank multi-lingual survey templates

    When you create a new survey in Snap XMP select the survey template with the required language. In this example, the Blank Template with Welsh Edition survey template is used.

    1. Click Survey Overview   on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Survey Overview window.
    2. Click Online Surveys   on the Survey Overview toolbar to show the online surveys.
    3. Click   to create a new online survey.
    4. Choose one of the multi-lingual survey templates as a starting point for the new survey. In this example, the Blank Template with Welsh Edition template is used. Select the survey template and click Next.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Enter the new survey’s name, title and location, then click OK.
    2. This creates a survey with editions for PC/laptop, tablet, phone and paper in English and Welsh. The edition details are shown on the tabs at the bottom of the questionnaire window.
    1. Immediately below the title there is a question asking the respondent to choose their preferred language. This is defined in the survey template by setting the ID.Language paradata as displayed in the questionnaire. This is set up in the Paradata section of the questionnaire properties.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Creating a map control

    This section shows how to convert the multi-choice language question to a map control.

    1. Select the language question and in the questionnaire toolbar, select Show in the second dropdown then select As Map Control in the third dropdown and select the Show checkbox.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. This shows an area under the question text that says Double click to define Map Control. Double click on this area. This opens the Map Control Editor.
    2. The next step is to import an image that contains the visual selection for each language. In this example, an image of the Welsh and British flags is used. Click the File menu then Import image. Browse to the image and click Open. The image is displayed in the Designer tab of the Map Control Editor.
    3. Next, you need to define the shape of the clickable area for each language. First, set the colour of the outline by clicking the Outline pen . Select the colour and width required and click OK.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click the Tools menu then select a shape. In this case, Square is selected. Draw the area around each flag.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Fill then select a colour and intensity, then click OK. This will show as a highlight when the respondent selects the flag.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Use the Preview tab to test how the map control will behave during the interview.
    Graphical user interface, application, Word

Description automatically generated
    1. Click OK to save the map control. If you wish to save the map control to use in other questionnaires, click the File menu then Save map control from the Designer tab.
    2. Repeat Step 1 for each edition of your survey that requires the map control for the language question.
    3. Click Save to save the changes to the questionnaire.

    Further Information

    The Blank templates are a good starting point but, in Snap XMP, you can also add an additional language as well as create a new language edition.

    There is also a webinar Multi Lingual Surveys and Forms from Snap Surveys on Vimeo  to help you build multi-lingual surveys.

    The post Selecting the language in a multi-lingual questionnaire using the map control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    How to customise check boxes using style mode https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/customise-check-boxes-using-style-mode/ Wed, 01 Dec 2021 14:32:18 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6940 There are two modes available in the Questionnaire window that can help you create questionnaires. These are: the Design mode where you can add and modify individual questions and the Style mode where you define the look of the question types used in the questionnaire. Style mode allows you to change the questions appearance and […]

    The post How to customise check boxes using style mode appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    There are two modes available in the Questionnaire window that can help you create questionnaires. These are: the Design mode where you can add and modify individual questions and the Style mode where you define the look of the question types used in the questionnaire. Style mode allows you to change the questions appearance and create a customised question style using your organisation’s branding such as font, colour scheme and background.

    In this tutorial, the style mode is used to show how to customise check boxes and radio buttons in the closed question styles including Multi Choice, Single Choice, Grid and Semantic Scale styles. In Snap XMP Desktop, the default style is a check box for multiple response questions and a radio button for single response questions. Snap XMP Desktop provides image files that you can use for check boxes and radio buttons. These are in pairs, comprising an empty and a checked/selected version of each graphic. You can:

    • use the defined pairs of Snap XMP Desktop box graphics
    • combine the Snap XMP Desktop box graphics into different pairs
    • use your own graphics

    The Snap XMP Desktop graphic box naming convention is used to define pairs of check boxes and radio buttons. If you create your own images, using the same naming convention will let you see them in the list of On and Off images when you browse for them. Groups of check boxes and radio buttons with the same name will be synchronized, if this option is selected.

    CheckedUnchecked
    Check boxcheck-Name-on
    check-Name-x (cross)
    check-Name-t (tick)
    check-Name-off
    Check box (Rounded square)checkRS-Name-on
    checkRS-Name-x
    checkRS-Name-t
    checkRS-Name-off
    Radio buttonradio-Name-on
    radio-Name-x
    radio-Name-t
    radio-Name-off

    Once the new question style is complete you can save the new style to use in other questionnaires or create a Survey Template based on the questionnaire.

    Step 1: Setting the box images

    In this tutorial, a Multi Choice question style is used and the boxes are set to a specific image in Style mode.

    1. In the Questionnaire window, click Style Mode StyleModeIcon.png on the Questionnaire toolbar.
    2. Select the Multi Choice question. Selected questions are highlighted in red in Style mode.
    3. In the Question style list, select All ‘Multi-Choice’ Styles. Any changes will be applied to all questions with a Multi Choice question style.
    Qu1a.png
    1. Select Boxes in the topics list then select Images in the adjacent list, as the type of box.
    AllStyleTbr1.png
    1. Click the Images button on the toolbar to open the Image Checkboxes dialog.
    AllStyleTbr2.png
    1. Check the Synchronise box to apply a set of four images that are defined using the Snap XMP Desktop graphic box naming convention.
    2. Click the Edit button by the Off (unselected) box. This opens the Image Properties dialog.
    ImageCheckboxes1.png
    1. Click Browse to select a new image for the boxes. Snap XMP Desktop checkbox images are stored in the sub-folder Styles\Checkboxes of your installation folder.
    2. Select the folder containing the image size you want then select the image style required.
    ImageProperties2.PNG
    1. Set a color in the Colourize Gif field if you want to match the box color to your branding.
    2. Click OK to use the selected style for checkboxes and radio buttons in all your multi-choice questions.
    3. Click OK again to return to the questionnaire. All the Multi Choice questions show the updated check box images.

    Step 2: Saving the new question style

    You can save any changes as a question style so they can be re-used.

    1. Make sure you are in Style mode StyleModeIcon.png and select the multi-choice question you have changed.
    2. Click Style Organizer StylePickerIcon.png on the Questionnaire toolbar. This opens the Style Organiser.
    3. The style of the selected question is highlighted and an image of the question is displayed in the Example pane.
    StyleOrg1.png
    1. Click Properties to open the Style Properties dialog
    2. Change the Name to describe the style.
    3. Click OK to save your style. The new style is now available for you to use elsewhere in the survey.
    StyleProperties1.png

    Further information can be found in the help on Changing the question boxes and Using Styles.

    Saving the questionnaire styles

    The questionnaire styles can be saved in a Style Template or the questionnaire can be used to create a Survey Template.

    To save the question styles as a Style Template:

    1. Click DesignModeIcon.png to change to the Design mode.
    2. Click EditionsIcon.png on the toolbar to open the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
    3. Click Save to save the style template. You can use these styles in a different questionnaire by loading the saved style template from the same dialog.
    EditAndStyl1.png

    Saving the questionnaire to create a Survey Template is described in the tutorial Creating a branded Survey Template.

    If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post How to customise check boxes using style mode appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using YouTube videos in a questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-youtube-videos/ Tue, 28 Sep 2021 09:40:30 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6534 In Snap XMP Desktop, a questionnaire can contain a link to a video on YouTube or another similar website. You can also insert media objects directly into a questionnaire. The easiest way to link to a YouTube video is to use the embed code provided on the YouTube site. This is a piece of HTML […]

    The post Using YouTube videos in a questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In Snap XMP Desktop, a questionnaire can contain a link to a video on YouTube or another similar website. You can also insert media objects directly into a questionnaire.

    The easiest way to link to a YouTube video is to use the embed code provided on the YouTube site. This is a piece of HTML used to embed the link to your chosen video. This tutorial shows how to link to one of Snap Survey’s videos available on YouTube, explaining how to find the embed code and insert it into your questionnaire. Additionally, the tutorial shows how to insert your organisation’s video files directly into the questionnaire.

    You can insert media objects directly in your survey, but you must link to a YouTube video as it is not stored with the survey.

    If you insert video objects directly into your survey, you may have problems, as the people viewing the videos may have different video applications. This means that unless they have downloaded and installed the correct video player to see your video, they may not be able to view the video at all.

    If you are not dealing with confidential information, it is usually better to upload the video to a site such as YouTube, and then link to the uploaded video, rather than inserting the video directly. Even then there may be some problems, depending on the capabilities of the device, its browser and its installed video applications.

    Step 1: Getting the YouTube link

    Find the video that you wish to link to on the YouTube site. The example used in this tutorial is at https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=12JyM-byxfs&list=PLOh-638DOTITHo-KkavRW1INQhlE1fAdx.

    1. Click the Share button below the video.
    SnapYouTube1.png
    1. This displays a set of ways to share the video. Click the Embed button.
    Share1.png
    1. An area displays showing the HTML code you need to embed the video in your survey. Click Copy to copy the link text to the clipboard. This is used for creating the link described in step 2.
    CopyLink1.png

    Step 2: Inserting the YouTube link

    1. Click Questionnaire to open the Questionnaire window. Select the online edition(s).
    2. Place the cursor where the YouTube video will be inserted and click the Insert button.
    3. Select HTML Field from the list. This opens the New HTML Field dialog.
    4. Select the Custom HTML radio button.
    5. Paste the text you copied from the YouTube embed field into the HTML pane.
    CreateLink1.png
    1. Click OK to close the dialog. The inserted HTML code displays as a single tag in your survey.
    2. Publish your survey. The YouTube video is available to the participant when they complete the questionnaire. The look of the video link will vary depending on the browser you are using.

    Inserting your own video file

    To insert a video directly into the survey, you will need to have access to the video file. You can embed small video files directly in the survey where it will be stored with all the other survey information. If the video is large, it is better to put it somewhere else on the Internet (such as YouTube) and link to it in the same way that you linked to the YouTube video.

    1. Place the cursor at the point where you wish to insert the video. This can be in any question but the Title, Sub-title or Instruction question styles are the most suitable, as they do not require any response.
    2. Click the Insert button and select Media Field from the menu. This opens the New media field dialog.
    3. Click Browse to select the media file. The file must be available locally or on your organisation’s network. You can use most multimedia file types.
    MediaFld.PNG
    1. Set the width and height for the file to display. This needs to be large enough to display controls for users to play a multimedia file. You may need to publish and preview the survey to get an accurate size.
    2. Set autoplay to 1 to play the file automatically when the partiicpant opens the questionnaire page.
    3. When you are happy with the settings, click OK.A link for the video is shown in the questionnaire.
    4. Publish the questionnaire in preview to check that the video displays correctly. The look of the video controls will vary depending on the browser you are using.

    If you wish to change the size of the display or the properties of the media object after it is inserted, double click the media file icon. This opens the New media field dialog.

    Further information

    You can insert audio files into your survey in the same way. See: Adding multimedia.

    For information about inserting HTML links and code, see: Using HTML.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Using YouTube videos in a questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Multi-Column Layouts https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/working-with-columns/ Wed, 22 Sep 2021 13:29:36 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6451 This tutorial explains how to create a questionnaire with a multi column layout when the participant is completing the survey. Step 1: Creating the survey Step 2: Setting the survey to multiple columns Note: You may notice that this adjustment and the upcoming Step 3 adjustments have little or no impact on the survey’s layout […]

    The post Multi-Column Layouts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This tutorial explains how to create a questionnaire with a multi column layout when the participant is completing the survey.

    Step 1: Creating the survey

    1. In Snap XMP Desktop, open the Survey Overview window.
    2. Click NewIcon.png to create a new survey. This opens a list of survey templates. Select the required template as the starting point for your survey. This example uses the Blank Template provided with Snap XMP Desktop. This creates a questionnaire with editions for PC/Laptop, Tablet, Phone and Paper.
    3. Click Next. This opens the New Online Survey dialog for online surveys or the New Survey dialog for offline surveys.
    4. Enter the survey name and title. For online surveys choose the folder location.
    5. Click OK. The new survey opens in the Questionnaire window, by default. The questionnaire has 4 editions: PC/Laptop, Tablet, Phone and Paper. You will need to check that the column layout you have set up works for the editions that are used.
    6. Add a title, sub-title and questions to the questionnaire.
    1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the changes.

    Step 2: Setting the survey to multiple columns

    1. Click Questionnaire properties QuestionnairePropsIcon.png to open the Questionnaire properties dialog.
    2. Select the Margins section, and set the Columns to 2.
    MarginProperties.PNG
    1. Click OK.

    Note: You may notice that this adjustment and the upcoming Step 3 adjustments have little or no impact on the survey’s layout in Design Mode. This is because the column layout is finalized when the survey is previewed, later in step 4.

    Step 3: Controlling the column layout

    1. When the questionnaire is running the Title and Sub-title variables are usually displayed across the full width of the page. Select the question and select the Columns topic then ensure that the Full Page option is enabled. (Note: The number to the right of the Columns selection is used in a separate feature to determine the column layout of the answer codes in a single or multi choice question.)
    1. Similarly, select the remaining questions in the survey and ensure that the Full Page option is not enabled.
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the changes.

    Step 4: Previewing the questionnaire

    1. Select File | Publish to open the Publish Questionnaire dialog.
    2. Set the Method to Preview Only.
    PublishPreviewDlg.PNG
    1. Click Publish to view the final column layout.
    SurveyColumns.PNG

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Multi-Column Layouts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Customizing the Slider Control templates https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/customizing-the-slider-control-templates/ Tue, 21 Sep 2021 14:18:53 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6438 Snap XMP Desktop is provided with several templates for Slider Controls for use in your questionnaires. You can adapt these templates to reflect your organisation’s branding. Slider Controls are made up of several graphics, plus some instructions on how they match to a question. All the information required for a Slider Control template is contained […]

    The post Customizing the Slider Control templates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Snap XMP Desktop is provided with several templates for Slider Controls for use in your questionnaires. You can adapt these templates to reflect your organisation’s branding.

    Slider Controls are made up of several graphics, plus some instructions on how they match to a question. All the information required for a Slider Control template is contained in a single file with an SLD extension. To make changes, you need to extract all the information, edit the graphics, and put them back into the Slider Control. This can be saved as a new Slider Control template.

    In this example the Slider Control template uses a five-step rating scale with code labels Very poor to Very good. This tutorial describes how to change the images used in the template and how to adapt the templates to show different rating scales.

    Extracting the Slider control template

    1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Questionnaire QuestionnaireIcon.png to open the survey in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Click New Question NewSurveyIcon.png  to add a new question.
    3. Select the Single Choice question style and then press Tab until you have 10 codes.
    Question.PNG
    1. Select Show in the toolbar topics menu then select As Slider Control in the next dropdown list and select the Show box.
    QuestionAsSlider.PNG
    1. Click the Slider Control button to open the Slider Control wizard. Alternatively, you can double-click the grey area representing the slider.
    2. Select the template you wish to change in the Slider Control wizard dialog.
    SelectSlider.PNG
    1. Click the Extract button. This allows you to choose the folder where the files will be saved.
    2. Select the folder to store the images, or click Make New Folder to store them in a new folder then click OK. Files containing the extracted graphics are saved to the selected directory.

    Editing the extracted graphics

    Any changes can be made to the graphics. If you change the height of horizontal graphics or width of vertical bars, you will need to make changes to the slider buttons and the graphic positions as well. For simplicity, this tutorial only changes the length of a slider bar.

    1. Open your preferred graphics software used to edit the graphics.
    2. Open the graphic to edit. The names of horizontal slider graphics are prefixed by “Horz” and vertical ones by “Vert”.
    3. Save a copy of the graphic under a different name
    4. Make the required edits. In this case, double the length of the horizontal bar image.
    5. Save the edited bar graphic.
    6. Check if you need to change the graphic for the slider button to match the new slider. To edit the graphic to match, make a copy of the button image before you make the required changes.

    Using the new graphics in a Slider Control

    1. Return to the questionnaire.
    2. Double click the Slider control to open the Slider Control wizard, if it is not open.
    3. Select the template that you wish to change.
    4. Click Advanced. This opens the Points on slider page of the Slider Control wizard. The points on the five-point template have been duplicated to create a ten point style that matches the question. The Snap code label column shows the code labels used in the questionnaire.
    SliderWiz.PNG
    1. Click the  button by the top image. This opens the Insert Image dialog.
    2. Click Remove and then click OK to remove the image and display the code label instead.
    3. Repeat for all the other images. If you are not using images, make sure that you have a text label for each point, as it will be displayed when the respondent moves the slider to that point.
    4. The preview shows the slider displaying the code labels instead of images. Move the slider button the whole length of the bar to confirm that you have removed all the images.
    SliderWizPreview.PNG

    Using the new slider graphic

    1. Click Next to set the bar graphic.
    SliderWizBar.PNG
    1. Click Browse to find your edited graphic. The preview window changes to show the longer bar.
    2. If you have also changed the slider button graphic, click Next twice to go to the Slider page where you set the slider button graphic, and browse for a graphic.

    Lining up the code labels with the slider

    By default, the code labels are put in the space left for the graphic. They now look a little high compared to the slider.

    1. From the Slider page in the Slider Control wizard, click the Next button twice to move to set the position of the code labels.
    SliderWizCodes.PNG
    1. Set the vertical space to 10. The preview shows the new position of the code labels. Change the number again if the code labels need further adjustment.
    SliderWizPreview2.PNG
    1. Click Finish to save your changes in the survey. You can turn your new slider into a template by clicking Save As.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Customizing the Slider Control templates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using clickable images as answer choices https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-clickable-images-as-answer-choices/ Thu, 09 Sep 2021 15:01:55 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6398 This tutorial shows you how to make a question interactive and more engaging by transforming question answers into clickable images. Snap XMP Desktop includes predefined images that you can use in your surveys, these are called Map Controls. Snap Surveys also provides a range of rating scales that you can download and use. This tutorial shows how […]

    The post Using clickable images as answer choices appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This tutorial shows you how to make a question interactive and more engaging by transforming question answers into clickable images.

    Snap XMP Desktop includes predefined images that you can use in your surveys, these are called Map Controls. Snap Surveys also provides a range of rating scales that you can download and use. This tutorial shows how to add a map control to your survey.

    Step 1: Add a question to your survey

    This section shows how to add a single question as a Map Control, you can also use multiple-response questions.

    1. In the Survey Overview window, open your survey.
    2. Click New Question NewIcon.png and set the question style as Single Choice. This adds a new Single Choice question.
    1. Enter your questionnaire text, in this example “Overall, how satisfied are you with your visit to the mall?”
    2. And the text for the answers, Very Satisfied, Satisfied, Neither satisfied nor dissatisfied, Dissatisfied and Very dissatisfied.

    Step 2: Add the map control

    The question is converted to a Map Control using the Show toolbar topic. You can then set up your Map Control using the Map Control Editor.

    1. Select the question you want to convert to a Map Control
    2. Choose the Show topic and select As Map Control then click the Show checkbox.
    3. Double-click the grey area or click the Map control button on the toolbar to open the Map Control Editor.
    4. Select File | Load Map Control.
    5. For this example, double click the ‘Lrg 5 Point Emoji Pos to Neg.isf’ file.
    OpenImageFile.PNG
    1. Click the Preview tab at the base of the Map Control Editor.
    PreviewMC.PNG
    1. Click on each smiley face in turn to check it behaves as you would expect (you are able to see the code label in the hover text).
    2. Click OK to save the Map Control and return to the questionnaire.
    3. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the questionnaire.
    4. Once the questionnaire is ready you can publish it and preview in Snap XMP Desktop or Snap XMP Online to test the question behaves as required.

    Further resources

    Further information can be found at: Creating a Map for analysis using an existing style explains how to change the way areas appear when the user clicks on them and Creating interactive images with a Map control

    There is a reference guide to the Map Control Editor.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com.

    The post Using clickable images as answer choices appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Translating your survey https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/translating-your-survey/ Fri, 16 Jul 2021 11:01:23 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6218 There are several ways of translating surveys in Snap XMP Desktop. If you use standard questions, you can add them to a multi-lingual SurveyPak, and then re-use them in other surveys, either by adding them directly to a multi-lingual questionnaire, or using the automatic translation facility. This tutorial explains how to export a file to […]

    The post Translating your survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    There are several ways of translating surveys in Snap XMP Desktop.

    • You can write the translation yourself (create a new language edition, and type in the translation)
    • You can use an external translator (create a text file to be translated, and import the translated file)
    • You can use pre-translated questions (create all the language editions that you need, and add a question that already has translations)
    • Use Snap XMP Desktop to automatically translate all the questions it recognises using reference questions (open the reference window and then use the Translation Wizard).

    If you use standard questions, you can add them to a multi-lingual SurveyPak, and then re-use them in other surveys, either by adding them directly to a multi-lingual questionnaire, or using the automatic translation facility.

    This tutorial explains how to export a file to send to an external translator and re-import the translated text to create a bilingual survey. The example uses a translation from English to Spanish.

    Step 1: Exporting the original version of your survey

    These steps assume that you have created your questionnaire in one language before you start.

    1. In the Survey Overview window, click Questionnaire QuestionnaireIcon.png to open the survey in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select File|Translation to display the Translation Wizard dialog.
    3. In Action, select Prepare External Translation.
    Translation1.PNG
    1. Click Next. In Export, select Reference file only to create a list of the phrases that need translating. If you already have translated some of the questions, export to a Reference with a matched translation. This creates two files, one with the list of text to be translated, and one with the list of texts that have been translated (with gaps for untranslated text).
    Translation2.PNG
    1. Make a note of the File name you use so you can find it later. Check the Omit repeated content box to leave out phrases that are used in multiple places (for example, ratings questions might all have the same possible answers).
    2. Click Start to generate your file. When the export has completed, you will be given a brief report. If you want to keep a copy of the report, click Send To to save it to a file.
    3. Click OK to close the window.

    Step 2: Sending the file to the translator

    You now have a text file that you can send to your translator. They need to produce a translated file that matches the file that the translation wizard has produced. It needs to have the same number of lines and the same instructions to the translation wizard. These should not be translated. It also needs to be a plain text file (not a Word document).

    The instructions are used to describe the question, and are all in capitals. For example, a section of the questionnaire appears in the file like this

    START
    NOTE 2 (ref:N2)
    About Yourself 
    NOTE 3 (ref:N3) 
    Please spend a few moments filling in this questionnaire. SUMMARY 
    Spend a few moments filling in questionnaire 
    NOTE 4 (ref:N4) 
    Please read each question carefully and tick a box to indicate your answer. 
    SUMMARY 
    Read each question carefully 
    QUESTION 5 (ref:Q1) 
    Are you male or female? 
    SUMMARY 
    Respondent gender 
    ANSWER 
    Male 
    Female 

    You would ask your translator to translate the phrases between the lines in capitals. Their translation would look something like this.

    START
    NOTE 2 (ref:N2)
    Sobre Usted
    NOTE 3 (ref:N3)
    Por favor, dedique unos instantes a rellenar este cuestionario.
    SUMMARY
    Dedique unos instantes a rellenar este cuestionario
    NOTE 4 (ref:N4)
    Por favor, lea detenidamente cada pregunta y marque una casilla para indicar su respuesta.
    SUMMARY
    Lea detenidamente cada pregunta
    QUESTION 5 (ref:Q1)
    ¿Es usted hombre o mujer?
    SUMMARY
    Género
    ANSWER
    Hombre
    Mujer
    

    The generated translation file starts with a set of notes for the translator

    • please translate between ‘START’ and ‘END’
    • please do not translate START, END, TOPIC, NOTE, QUESTION, SUMMARY, ANSWER, FOOTNOTE, LANGUAGE: , etc.
    • please do not add or remove lines
    • Un-translatable questions may be removed provided the declaration line is left (and only this line)

    {The declaration line is the line containing the reference name eg ‘(ref:V101)’}

    • Please only place comments or warnings about a question at the end of the declaration line, following the ‘(ref:Vn)’

    Step 3: Importing the new translated file

    Before importing the translation, check your translated text file to make sure it has the same number of lines as the original, and all the lines in capitals are the same as in the original file.

    For the import you will need both the original exported file and the translated file.

    1. Open the questionnaire in the Questionnaire design window. When you import the translated fileY this creates a new language edition of your questionnaire.
    QuestEng.PNG
    1. Select File|Translation to open the Translation Wizard dialog.
    2. Select Apply External Translation in the Action drop-down and click Next.
    Translation4.PNG
    1. Select the original language as the Reference Language. This is English in our English to Spanish example.
    Translation5.PNG
    1. Set the File name for the Reference Language to the file that you exported from the survey in Step 1.
    2. Select Add Language as the translation language. This adds a new language edition to your questionnaire. (If you already have the correct language in your questionnaire, just select it in the list.)
    DefineLang.PNG
    1. The Define Language dialog opens. Set the language name in the Name list and click OK.
    Translation6.PNG
    1. Set the File name for the Translation language to the translated text file.
    2. Click Start.
    3. When the translation import finishes, you will see a report window. This shows the report on a question with numerals, where the numbers are the same in both languages.If you want to keep a copy of the report, click Send To to save it to a file.
    4. Click OK to clear the window.
    5. The translated language is added to your questionnaire. Click on the new edition tab to display it. By default, a language question is inserted at the beginning of the questionnaire, allowing the respondent to select the language they would like to use. This language question can be edited as required.
    QuestEsp.PNG

    Further information

    If you would like to find out more about running a multi-lingual questionnaire, see Languages.

    For more information about running a survey in multiple languages, see the worksheet Creating a new language edition.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Translating your survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Laying out a grid question for an online survey https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/laying-out-grid-question/ Fri, 16 Jul 2021 10:11:44 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6146 When running a survey online, you do not have the same level of control over the way the surveys looks when compared to printing a paper survey. The questionnaire layout can look quite different when displayed on different monitors using different web browsers. It is worth checking the layout on a number of browsers, using […]

    The post Laying out a grid question for an online survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    When running a survey online, you do not have the same level of control over the way the surveys looks when compared to printing a paper survey. The questionnaire layout can look quite different when displayed on different monitors using different web browsers. It is worth checking the layout on a number of browsers, using different monitors and window sizes, before sending it to any participants.

    Grid layouts can be affected by this and Snap XMP Desktop provides several tools to assist you in laying out grid questions and adjusting positioning of the separate elements.

    This tutorial shows you how to adjust the layout of a grid question:

    • Set the grid boxes so that they are vertically centred
    • Hide the question number and remove the space left for it
    • Change the spacing between the grid elements
    • Adjust the page margins

    The original grid question before the changes is shown:

    GridQuestionOriginal.PNG

    Step 1: Removing question numbers

    1. In the Questionnaire window, click Style Mode StyleModeIcon.png .
    2. Select All Styles from the question style list. Any changes made will now affect all questions.
    3. Select Show from the toolbar topic menu.
    4. Select Name (for question numbers) or Grid Name (for grid question numbers) from the element list.
    5. Clear the Show box to hide the question numbers.
    RemoveQuestionNos.PNG

    The question is shown with no question number:

    GridQuestionNoQuestion.PNG

    Step 2: Align response boxes vertically

    The preview shows that the response circles are vertically aligned with the bottom of the row. You can change that by adjusting the alignment.

    1. In the Questionnaire window, click Style Mode StyleModeIcon.png .
    2. Select All ‘Grid’ Styles from the question style list. Any changes made will now affect all Grid question styles.
    3. Select Alignment from the toolbar topic menu.
    4. Select Code Box from the element list.
    5. The first box (showing Center in the image) gives the horizontal alignment.
    6. The second box (showing Middle in the image) gives the vertical alignment.
    GidQuestionCenter.PNG
    1. Set the vertical alignment to Middle.

    Step 3: Adjusting the grid question spacing

    The spacing of a grid question is calculated proportionately to the browser window size. This is because you do not know how respondents will be viewing your questionnaire. You can define the amount of available space that is given to each element using the Tabs option. The diagram below shows the element names and the areas they affect.

    GridElements.png

    Remove the space left for the hidden question numbers

    1. Make sure that the Questionnaire window is in Style Mode StyleModeIcon.png . If you have switched to design mode in the mean time, click Style Mode StyleModeIcon.png  again
    2. Select All Styles from the question style list.
    3. Select Tabs from the toolbar topic menu.
    4. Select Name from the element list.
    RemoveQuSpace.PNG
    1. Reduce the space for the Name element down to 0%. This will move the questions to the left-hand side of the questionnaire.

    The grid question is shown with the spacing removed:

    GridQuestionNoSpace.PNG

    Increase the space between the grid columns and remove the right-hand space

    The code gutter describes the space between the grid columns. Increasing the code gutter will increase the width of the grid and display the code boxes further apart.

    The code verge describes the space between the last grid column and the right hand side of the questionnaire.

    1. Make sure that the Questionnaire window is in Style Mode StyleModeIcon.png . If you have switched to design mode in the mean time, click Style Mode StyleModeIcon.png  again
    2. Select All ‘Grid’ Styles from the question style list.
    3. Select Tabs from the toolbar topic menu.
    4. Select Code Gutter from the element list.
    GidQuestionCodeGutter.PNG
    1. Increase the space for the Code Gutter element to 15%.
    2. Select Code Verge from the element list.
    GidQuestionCodeVerge.PNG
    1. Reduce the space for the Code Verge element down to 0%. This removes the space between the question and the right-hand side of the window.
    GridQuestionSpacing.PNG
    1. Align the grid row labels with the question text by setting the Code Offset to 0%.
    GridQuestionCodeOffset.PNG

    Step 4: Changing the page settings

    1. Click Publish PublishIcon.png from the Questionnaire toolbar.
    2. Set the Method to publish your questionnaire to Preview only.
    3. Click the Publish button to display the questionnaire as it will appear to the participant. There’s still space between the edges of the window and the grid question in the published survey. This is set in the Margins option in Questionnaire properties.
    GridQuestionLive1.PNG
    1. Click QuestionnairePropsIcon.png  to open the Questionnaire properties dialog.
    2. Select Margins in the Section list.
    3. Set all the margins value to 0px and click OK.
    QuestProps.PNG
    1. Publish your questionnaire to preview again. Your grid question should now expand to fit the whole of the browser window.
    GridQuestionLive2.PNG

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Laying out a grid question for an online survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Questionnaire properties https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-questionnaire-properties/ Thu, 01 Jul 2021 14:09:13 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6083 The questionnaire properties affect the appearance and operation of the questionnaire in design and when running as a live interview. They are set in the Questionnaire Properties dialog which can be opened in the Questionnaire window by clicking on Questionnaire Properties  . The options available depend on the selected edition in the Questionnaire window. All options are […]

    The post Questionnaire properties appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The questionnaire properties affect the appearance and operation of the questionnaire in design and when running as a live interview. They are set in the Questionnaire Properties dialog which can be opened in the Questionnaire window by clicking on Questionnaire Properties QuestionnairePropsIcon.png  .

    The options available depend on the selected edition in the Questionnaire window. All options are available for Snap Online editions. In Paper and Scanning editions, the available options are Edition, Page, Margins, Paradata and Texts.

    The post Questionnaire properties appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Tailoring survey settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/tailoring-survey-settings/ Thu, 24 Jun 2021 15:01:50 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5958 The Tailor menu provides a series of dialogs. You can configure parameters that provide default settings for the current survey or affect the way operations are performed. Changes to these parameters can be for the current session or saved as part of the current survey. The settings in the Tailor options are the defaults for the current […]

    The post Tailoring survey settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Tailor menu provides a series of dialogs. You can configure parameters that provide default settings for the current survey or affect the way operations are performed. Changes to these parameters can be for the current session or saved as part of the current survey. The settings in the Tailor options are the defaults for the current survey.

    Tailoring Settings

    The tailoring settings are available for the following:

    Tailor | Current Window will tailor the window that is currently being used, and any changes that you keep or use will immediately affect the information displayed in that window.

    The post Tailoring survey settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    How to display a currency sign beside a code box https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/display-currency-sign-beside-code-box/ Fri, 28 May 2021 10:01:44 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5760 When questions are designed which require currency values to be clearly identifiable, include the words or symbols representing the currency outside the applicable box. This will indicate to the participant that only a numeric value needs to be entered. Open the survey in the Questionnaire window in Design Mode. Select the question where you want […]

    The post How to display a currency sign beside a code box appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    When questions are designed which require currency values to be clearly identifiable, include the words or symbols representing the currency outside the applicable box. This will indicate to the participant that only a numeric value needs to be entered.

    1. Open the survey in the Questionnaire window in Design Mode.
    2. Select the question where you want to add the currency sign.
    Currency question-t1.png
    1. Select Show from the Topics menu.
    2. From the next drop-down select Grid Label and place a tick in the box next to Show.
    Currency question grid label - t2.png
    1. Delete the pre-existing text and type in the currency sign, then from the Topics menu select Alignment and set to Right.
    2. If you wish to increase the size of the currency sign, select the symbol then select Font from the Topics menu and change the font size.
    3. Select Tabs from the Topics menu and change the Tab percent for Grid Label to the desired location and set the Code Offset to 0%.
    Currency question final - t3.png

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post How to display a currency sign beside a code box appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adjusting a title logo to fit on a Smartphone edition https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adjusting-logo-fit-smartphone-edition/ Fri, 28 May 2021 08:36:26 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5751 This worksheet describes how to resize the title logo to fit onto a Smartphone edition. Step 1: Cloning the title logo on the Smartphone edition Step 2: Hiding the original title logo on the Smartphone edition Step 3: Resizing the cloned logo on the Smartphone edition Step 4: Hiding the Smartphone logo on the other […]

    The post Adjusting a title logo to fit on a Smartphone edition appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This worksheet describes how to resize the title logo to fit onto a Smartphone edition.

    Step 1: Cloning the title logo on the Smartphone edition

    1. In the Smartphone edition, select the title logo and then click on the Clone icon     cid:image001.png@01D640A2.585B5AF0
    2. The cloned title logo is inserted below the original title logo.

    Step 2: Hiding the original title logo on the Smartphone edition

    1. Right click on the original title logo and select Hide Variable from the menu.
    2. You should now have one title logo available and one hidden.

    Step 3: Resizing the cloned logo on the Smartphone edition

    1. Double click on the available logo and this shows the Image Properties window. In Zoom, enter the percentage zoom setting. Start with a zoom setting of 50% which halves the logo size. You may want to adjust the percentage slightly more depending on the logo you are using.
    2. When you are happy with the size, click OK.
    1. You now have a resized logo that is the right fit for the Smartphone edition:

    Step 4: Hiding the Smartphone logo on the other editions

    1. If the survey has other editions, such as WebHost or tablet editions, these still have two title logos.
    1. For each of these editions, select the smaller logo then right click and select Hide Variable from the menu. Now only the larger title logo is available.
    1. Once all of the title logos are correct, publish the survey file and test it on your Smartphone screen. Check that the title logo fits the screen well and doesn’t cause any scrolling across the screen.

    This worksheet has described how to ensure that you have the correct logo size for your Smartphone edition so that it is not too big for the screen.

    If you are using the default page width for your tablet edition, you do not have to resize your logo. You can use the logo you have used for your PC edition as the page widths for these editions are very close in size. The default size for the tablet is 1023px and the default size for the PC edition is 1024px.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Adjusting a title logo to fit on a Smartphone edition appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a personalised style template https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-personalised-style-template/ Thu, 27 May 2021 12:39:08 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5688 Snap XMP Desktop provides a number of pre-defined question styles that can be used as supplied or as the basis for a new question style. In Snap XMP Desktop, you can create question styles that reflect your organization’s branding, bringing a consistent look to your questionnaires. The question styles determine the colors, fonts and layout used. […]

    The post Creating a personalised style template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Snap XMP Desktop provides a number of pre-defined question styles that can be used as supplied or as the basis for a new question style. In Snap XMP Desktop, you can create question styles that reflect your organization’s branding, bringing a consistent look to your questionnaires. The question styles determine the colors, fonts and layout used. The personalised question styles used in a questionnaire can be saved to create a style template. The style templates can be loaded, edited and saved for use in other questionnaires. This feature allows you to quickly format a questionnaire with a consistent look each time.

    Step 1: Create the new question styles

    1. Add your questions to the questionnaire and then customise them so they appear as you require. For example, you may decide to change the number of columns within a question (see the example below), use a different font or change the style of the boxes etc. Use the Topic menu to make these changes to your questions.
    Multi-Choice question in the Questionnaire window
    1. When you customise a default question style this creates a new unnamed style; this adds ‘like’ at the beginning of the default name in the Styles Selection list.
    Question style list
    1. In order for this new style of question to be added to the template it has to be saved with a name. To name an unnamed style, select the question then switch to Style Mode StyleModeIcon.png .
    2. Select the Style Organiser StylePickerIcon.png icon.
    Style Organiser with a like Multi Choice style selected
    1. The question selected in the Questionnaire Design window is highlighted in the Styles list in the Style Organiser dialog. Click on the Properties button and name the new style in the Style Properties dialog, e.g. Multi Choice 4 Columns.
    2. Click Ok to close the Style Properties dialog and then OK again to close the Style Organiser dialog box. Any questions in the questionnaire that have the same customisation applied to them are renamed to the new style name.
    New Multi Choice question style
    1. Repeat the steps 1 to 6 to save any customised questions in the questionnaire with a named style.

    Step 2: Save the style template

    1. Click DesignModeIcon.png to return to Design Mode; the newly named styles will be available in the Style Selection dropdown list.
    2. Once you have saved all the styles that you want to use in your questionnaire the styles can be saved in a style template.Click Editions and Style Templates EditionsIcon.png .
    Editions and Style Templates
    1. Click the Save button from the Style Template section.
    2. Save the new template by giving it a name, e.g. House Style.qsf, then click Save. The new template is saved in the Snap XMP Desktop Styles folder.

    Step 3: Load a style template

    1. To access a saved style click Editions and Style Templates EditionsIcon.png , then click on the Load button and browse to the appropriate saved style file.
    2. All the new question styles that have been created and saved are now loaded from the template selected. You can determine what level of the template you want to apply based on 3 options.
      • Page Setup – portrait/ landscape (for paper questionnaires) etc.
      • Colours – the individual colour for the background/fonts/boxes, etc.
      • Layout – the arrangement and format of individual styles of questions.

    If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Creating a personalised style template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Providing information using hyperlinks and Alt text https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/providing-information-hyperlinks-alt-text/ Wed, 26 May 2021 15:08:16 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5661 There may be occasions when you need to provide additional information for participants during the survey. This can range from information such as privacy policies or further instructions for a question, which are too long to provide within the survey, to short descriptions for an image or text reader. These can be provided by inserting […]

    The post Providing information using hyperlinks and Alt text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    There may be occasions when you need to provide additional information for participants during the survey. This can range from information such as privacy policies or further instructions for a question, which are too long to provide within the survey, to short descriptions for an image or text reader. These can be provided by inserting hyperlinks to the additional information that open in a new browser tab so the survey is not interrupted, and by adding Alt text in images.

    Step 1: Creating the hyperlink to another web page

    1. Click Survey Overview SurveyOverviewIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Survey Overview window.
    2. Click Online Surveys OnlineSurveysIcon.png or Offline Surveys OfflineSurveysIcon.png , as required, and open the survey in the Questionnaire window.
    3. Select the text that will become the clickable hyperlink.
    Question with a hyperlink to access more information
    1. Right-click the text and select Insert then HTML field from the context menu. (An Insert button is also available on the toolbar when you have Fonts selected in the Toolbar topics menu.) This opens the New HTML Field dialog. By default, the selected text appears as the Web address.
    New HTML Field dialog
    1. Edit the text in the Web Address box to show the site you want to link to, e.g., www.snapsurveys.com.
    New HTML Field dialog with web address entered
    1. Click OK. The start and end hyperlink tags are inserted in the questionnaire. Double click on the hyperlink text to edit.
    Question showing hyperlink tags

    Step 2: Testing the hyperlink

    When you have completed your questionnaire design, test the hyperlink using the preview option.

    1. Click Publish to open the Publish Questionnaire dialog.
    2. In Method, select Preview only.
    Publish the questionnaire
    1. Click Publish to open a preview of the survey and check that the hyperlink works as expected.

    Step 3: Providing image descriptions using Alt text

    When an image is inserted into an online survey, there is the option of adding Alt text. This is text that provides a brief description of the image that is shown when the image is not available, when the mouse hovers over the image and is used by text readers.

    When inserting the image, complete the Alt text field below the image. Describe the image and its function briefly to conform to accessibility guidelines. A new image can be inserted using the Insert button when Fonts is selected in the Toolbar topics menu. Double click on an existing image to edit.


    ImageAltTxt.PNG
    When testing the survey, move your mouse over the image. In most browsers, the Alt text will be displayed.
    AltText.PNG

    If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Providing information using hyperlinks and Alt text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using Rating Check to ensure ranking https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/rating-check-ensure-ranking/ Wed, 26 May 2021 13:53:17 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5582 Often you would like to ask the participants of your survey to rank a number of options in a given order. A grid question can be used to achieve this by setting the Rating Check property. This property ensures participants answer the question with one ranking in each aspect or row. Step 1: Adding the […]

    The post Using Rating Check to ensure ranking appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Often you would like to ask the participants of your survey to rank a number of options in a given order. A grid question can be used to achieve this by setting the Rating Check property. This property ensures participants answer the question with one ranking in each aspect or row.

    Step 1: Adding the rated grid question

    1. Open the questionnaire in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Click New Question NewIcon.png to create the new question that will be used for rating.
    3. Select Grid First in the style list.
    4. Enter the question text “Please rate the following modes of transport in order of frequency of use”.
    5. Press Tab and type 1 as the first code label then press Tab again to create a new code label and repeat until you have 5 code labels from 1 to 5.
    6. Press the down arrow to enter the text “Foot” in the grid label
    7. Press Ctrl+Enter to create a new row in the grid. This has the style Grid Next. Enter the text for the grid label. Repeat the process for each row required.
    Grid Question rating the mode of transport
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png .

    Step 2: Setting the Rating Check property

    1. Select the rated grid question then click Variable Properties VariablePropsIcon.png to open the Variable Properties dialog.
    2. In the Rating Check property select Yes then click OK.
    Variable properties with Rating Check set to Yes
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png .

    The participant will only be able to select one choice in each rating or column of the rating grid question when they are completing the questionnaire.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Using Rating Check to ensure ranking appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating interactive images with a Map control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-interactive-images/ Wed, 26 May 2021 10:30:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5539 This tutorial describes how to use your own images to make a question interactive and more engaging. We will use the gender question as the example for this worksheet.  Sample images are available to download below. Download the sample images using right-click and selecting ‘Save Image as…’ Snap Surveys also provides a range of rating scales that […]

    The post Creating interactive images with a Map control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This tutorial describes how to use your own images to make a question interactive and more engaging.

    We will use the gender question as the example for this worksheet.  Sample images are available to download below.

    Download the sample images using right-click and selecting ‘Save Image as…’

    Sample images
    Sample images

    Snap Surveys also provides a range of rating scales that you can download and use.

    Snap XMP Desktop allows you to show coded questions as clickable images. These are known as Map Controls. To create your own Map Control you must edit your image in the Map Control Editor.

    You can convert single and multi-response questions to Map Controls. You must define an area of the image that represents each code, and then set how it will appear when the respondent clicks on it. The image used to form the structure of the map control can be a picture of anything – it is not limited to a cartographical map. Possibilities include:

    • map of a country, region or district split up into areas
    • schematic picture of a human body which may be used to indicate areas affected by injury or disease
    • photograph of a street scene with potentially hazardous situations marked

    Map Controls can be associated with single-response and multiple-response questions in electronic editions of the questionnaire, such as, Snap Online, tablet, kiosk or smartphone.

    Step 1: Add the question

    This section describes adding the single-response Gender question to your questionnaire.

    1. Open your survey in Snap XMP Desktop.
    2. Add a new question. If it is not already a Single choice type question then change it to one and set it as Single response.
    Single Choice question
    Single Choice
    1. Enter your questionnaire text (Are you male or female?) and two codes.

    Step 2: Define the map control

    You convert your question to a Map Control using the Show toolbar topic and then set up your Map Control in the Map Control Editor. You must choose an image and then define the clickable areas.

    1. Select the Map Control question.
    2. Choose the Show topic and select As Map Control, then click the Show checkbox.
      AddMapControl.PNG
    3. Double-click the gray area or click the [Map control] button on the toolbar to open the Map Control Editor.
    4. Select File | Import image… and browse for your image.
    5. Select the rectangle rectangle_btn.gif .
    Map Control Editor
    1. Draw a rectangle around the male icon. This defines the clickable area for the respondent to select a code.
    2. Select Shape | Assign to code, and select the appropriate code.
    Map Control Editor showing the Assign to code selection
    1. Click the Colour Filter overlay.gif  button. This sets which colour you want to use to highlight the area when it has been selected.
    2. Choose a blue and click Close.
    3. Select the rectangle rectangle_btn.gif and draw a rectangle around the female icon. Assign the code and set a different colour.
    4. Click the Preview tab at the base of the window.
    Map Control Preview
    1. Click on each area in turn to check it behaves as you would expect.
    2. Click OK to return to the questionnaire.

    Step 3: Making the map control a “Must answer” question

    You can apply must answer and minimum and maximum response requirements to Map Controls and Slider Control questions.

    1. Select the image map question in your questionnaire.
    2. Click VariablePropsIcon.png or press [Alt]+[Enter] to display the Variable Properties for the question.
    3. Scroll down to find Must Answer and set it to Yes.
    Variable Properties with Must answer set to Yes
    1. Click OK to force respondents to answer the gender question.

    Step 4: Save your Map Control to use again

    You can save your Map Control so that you can use it in other surveys and other editions.

    1. Double-click the Map Control to open the Map Control Editor.
    2. Select File | Save map control and browse for a folder.
    3. Give your Map Control file a name and click Save.

    Step 5: Change the Map Control for different screen sizes

    Map Controls can take a lot of screen space and take time to load. You can change their size to make them suitable for smaller screens. You can remove them if you are concerned about load time.

    1. Create the Map Control question in your new edition or survey. (Use a Snap Online edition for an adaptive survey, or mobile for one which is only going to be used on mobile devices).
    2. Convert the question to a Map Control (Choose the Show topic and select As Map Control, then click the Show checkbox). If you have added an additional edition to your survey, you will see the gender Map Control. If it is a new survey, you must load your saved Map Control.
    3. Double-click the gray area to open the Map Control Editor.
    4. Select File|Load map control and select the control you saved earlier.
    5. The gender map will load. Select the size control and change the size to 50%. The map will resize.
    Map Control Resize
    1. Click OK to leave the Map Control Editor.

    Removing a map control

    You can remove a map control from a question.

    1. Select your Map Control question.
    2. Select the Show toolbar topic.
    3. Select As Map Control by clearing the Show box.
    Show the Map Control as a Single Choice question

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Creating interactive images with a Map control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Drag and Drop https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/drag-and-drop/ Wed, 26 May 2021 09:50:49 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=5508 This tutorial shows how to make a standard grid question interactive and more engaging, by transforming it into a Drag and Drop question for ranking or categorising. You can convert single response Grid First questions to a Drag and Drop question in Snap. There are 2 types of drag and drop styles: Possibilities include: Single […]

    The post Drag and Drop appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This tutorial shows how to make a standard grid question interactive and more engaging, by transforming it into a Drag and Drop question for ranking or categorising.

    You can convert single response Grid First questions to a Drag and Drop question in Snap. There are 2 types of drag and drop styles:

    • Ranking allows you to rank the answer choices in the grid
    • Categorise allows you to Categorise answer choices in different boxes in the grid

    Possibilities include:

    • Ranking answer choices in order of most favourite or most important
    • Categorising answer choices by how often they are purchased or visited

    Single response questions can be styled as Drag and Drop in electronic editions of the questionnaire, such as Snap Online, web, tablet, smartphone.

    Step 1: Add a Grid First question to your questionnaire

    This section describes adding the single-response Grid First question to your questionnaire.

    1. Open your survey in Snap.
    2. Open the Questionnaire window if it is not already open.
    3. Add a new Grid First question.
    Grid First question set to Single response
    1. Enter your question text (for example, Put the fruit in order of most favourite?).
    2. Press Tab on your keyboard and enter your code labels (for example, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, pressing Tab to move through each code position).
    3. Press the down arrow key to enter your first Grid label (for example, Apples).
    4. Press Tab to continue entering your Grid labels (for example, Grapes, Oranges and Peaches).

    Please note that you need to create the same number of grid code labels as the number of ranks or categories that you need, before converting the grid to a drag and drop question.

    Step 2: Change the question style to a Drag and Drop

    You convert your question to a Drag and Drop using the Show toolbar topic menu.

    1. Select the Grid First question.
    2. Choose the Show topic and select As Drag and Drop, and then click the Show checkbox. The Drag and Drop defaults to Categorize; select Rank. The question layout changes to a Source Panel on the left and a Target Panel on the right.
    Grid question shown as Drag and Drop
    1. Select Options if you wish to edit the background colours of the panels.
    Drag and drop options
    1. To preview the Drag and Drop, select File | Publish to display the Publish Questionnaire dialog. The Output Method defaults to Preview Only. Click Publish. The preview will open a new window and display the question as it would appear in a web browser.
    Ranking question shown in a live interview

    Alternatively, if you wish to create a Drag and Drop question for the purpose of categorising answer choices in different boxes (for example, how often items are purchased), you will need to change the default setting drop down of Rank to Categorize (See Step 2, point 2 above).

    Grid First question shown as Drag and Drop category question

    When the questionnaire is previewed, the Drag and Drop question will be displayed as below:

    Drag and Drop categorized question in a live interview

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Drag and Drop appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a new language edition https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-a-new-language-edition/ Wed, 12 May 2021 14:08:34 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4912 Editions of a questionnaire contain the same number of questions, in the same order, with the same response type for each question. Format editions contain different layouts for the questionnaire. Language editions have different text for the questionnaire. In Snap XMP Desktop a survey can have any number of formats, and any number of languages. […]

    The post Creating a new language edition appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Editions of a questionnaire contain the same number of questions, in the same order, with the same response type for each question. Format editions contain different layouts for the questionnaire. Language editions have different text for the questionnaire. In Snap XMP Desktop a survey can have any number of formats, and any number of languages. New language editions can use different languages, or use different question text in the same language. For example, you might want to publish the same questionnaire directed at adults or children. You could also localise the same questionnaire for different areas

    This tutorial describes how to create a dual-language questionnaire. If you are publishing to Snap XMP Online or Interviewer, you can set up the questionnaire so that the participant selects their preferred language and then completes the questionnaire in that language. The responses expected are identical for both languages.

    Each language edition consists of a name, a language code and the edition text.

    Name

    You need to enter a name that describes the new language edition when you create it. The name shows in the edition tab to help you identify the edition. Snap XMP Desktop provides default language names that are associated with a particular character set (e.g. Russian), but you can use any name, and select any character set.

    Language

    You select the language when you create a language edition. The languages are currently listed as ISO (International Standards Organisation) codes. This defines what characters you can use. (To see them appear correctly, you need to set up that language in Windows.) For example, if you select ru (Russian) you will be able to enter Cyrillic. If you are not sure which language is represented by a code, select a named language in the Name box, and note the code shown in the lower box.

    Edition Text

    The text includes all the text in your questionnaire, such as titles, question text and labels. When you create a new language edition, existing text is:

    • copied if an edition using the same language exists
    • omitted if a new language is used (but the original text appears in grey so you can see what you are translating from)

    Changing between the language editions

    When you create a new language edition, a tab for the new edition appears at the bottom of the questionnaire design window. Click on the tabs or use [Alt] [PgUp] and [Alt] [PgDn] to change from one edition to another. A new language edition is created for each current edition.

    Publishing

    When the survey is published all language and format editions are published together. The language edition used is identified in a system variable called ID.language. If you use it, a question is inserted in the questionnaire asking participants which language they would like to use. The survey language changes automatically according to the response to the inserted question.

    NOTE: For paper editions, each language edition is printed separately or a PDF is created for each language edition.

    Analysis

    Because the variables are exactly the same in all editions, even though the questionnaires may look different, you can combine data from questionnaires in different languages, and analyze it together.

    When you have multiple language editions of a questionnaire, the variable ID.language is created automatically. This is preloaded with the language value when you publish the questionnaire, allowing you to do analysis by language.

    Steps to create a multi-language survey

    The instructions below describe how to create Snap Online editions in Welsh and English. It assumes that you start with an English language edition, and have the Welsh language translation.

    Creating the language edition

    1. In the Survey Overview window, open the survey in Questionnaire Design mode.
    2. Click Editions and Style Templates EditionsIcon.png and view the current editions.
    Editions and Style Templates showing the survey's editions
    1. Click Language to open the Languages dialog.
    Language dialog listing the languages used in the survey
    1. Click Add to open the Define Language dialog.
    2. In the Name list select Welsh (United Kingdom) and click OK to take you back to the Language dialog.
    Adding the Welsh language in the Define language dialog
    1. In the Language dialog, select Swap keyboard layouts to set the keyboard layout to Welsh when this is the selected edition. (This will only have an effect if you have added Welsh to your computer using the Languages settings.)
    2. Click OK to save and return to the Editions and Style Templates dialog. Click OK to return to your questionnaire.
    3. A new tab appears at the bottom of the questionnaire showing the new language edition.
    Tabs used to switch to a different edition

    Making the language changes to the new edition

    1. In the Questionnaire Design window, select the Welsh language edition tab.
    2. Select a question to translate. The question displays the English text in pale grey to tell you what you need to translate.
    Pale grey text to aid translation
    1. Select the question text box and type or paste in the translation. You do not need to select or delete the grey text. It will disappear as soon as you write in the box.
    Translate the selected question text
    1. Repeat for the code labels and the other questions until your questionnaire is complete.

    Inserting the language paradata question to create a dual-language output

    1. Click Questionnaire Properties on the Questionnaire window toolbar. This opens the Questionnaire Properties dialog.
    2. In the Paradata section, select the Language system variable and select Display in survey.
    Display the Language ID in the questionnaire
    1. Click OK.
    2. This inserts a new single-response question at the top of your questionnaire.
    The language selection available to the participant in English
    1. Move it to the position you want, usually below the title, using the control and down arrow keys. (Do not use cut and paste, you will lose the special link to the language variable.)
    2. Edit the text so that it is appropriate for both languages:
    The language selection available to the participant in Welsh

    Publishing the dual-language edition

    1. Click Publish on the Questionnaire Design window toolbar and the Publish Questionnaire dialog opens.
    2. In the Paradata section, check that the Language variable is used in the survey. (If you cut and pasted the question that uses it, you may have deleted it by mistake.)
    3. In the Output section select the Publish with preview or Publish without preview, as required.
    4. Click Publish.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Creating a new language edition appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Viewing and removing dependents https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/viewing-and-removing-dependents/ Fri, 19 Mar 2021 13:21:18 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4473 You may have encountered this message when trying to remove a question: Dependents can be found in different aspects of a survey, including variables, analyses or reports that depend on another variable. If a variable has dependents you cannot delete it until all the things that are dependent on it, its dependents, have been removed. […]

    The post Viewing and removing dependents appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You may have encountered this message when trying to remove a question:

    Warning message: Cannot delete variables with dependents

    Dependents can be found in different aspects of a survey, including variables, analyses or reports that depend on another variable. If a variable has dependents you cannot delete it until all the things that are dependent on it, its dependents, have been removed.

    It is useful to know how to view the dependents. This identifies the dependencies that need to be removed before you can delete the variable.

    A dependent can use a variable in:

    • routing
    • a derived variable
    • a label of a variable
    • an analysis variable
    • analyses or reports

    Viewing Dependents

    In order to view the dependents for a variable:

    1. Click Variables on the main toolbar. This opens the Variables window.
    2. Click to select the variable.
    3. Click View Sources & Dependents . This opens the Sources/Dependencies window.
    View Sources and Dependents icon
    1. The Dependents columns shows the dependents for the question. This column shows a list of all the things that use or are dependent on Q9.
    Sources and dependencies window
    1. The Sources column contains a list of all the things that the variable depends on. Double click on V1 in the Dependents column to show the Sources/Dependencies for V1. In the Sources column, Q9 shows that V1 depends on Q9. Click Back UndoIcon.png to return to the Sources/Dependencies for Q9.
    Source and dependencies of the selected variable
    1. The icon shown next to the name shows the type of dependent or source.

    Analysis

    Analysis Variable

    Variable

    Report

    Removing Dependents

    In order to remove a dependent of the variable:

    1. In the Dependents column, click to select the dependent.
    2. Click the Properties button. This opens the properties window associated with the type of dependent that is selected. For example, V1 opens the Variable Details window. You can edit the dependent in the properties window.
    Open the dependent's properties window
    1. Click the Summary button to go to the dependent’s summary window. For example, in Variable Details this opens the Variables window.
    Open the Summary window
    1. Before deleting the dependent, close the properties window with the dependent’s details, for example, the Variable Details window containing V1.
    2. Return to the summary window, click to select the dependent, for example V1, then click Delete DeleteSurveyIcon.png to delete the dependent.
    Variables window showing the list of variables in the survey

    Please note that you will need to remove all dependents of a variable in order to delete it.

    The post Viewing and removing dependents appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using HTML https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-html/ Wed, 10 Mar 2021 16:27:15 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4093 Snap XMP Desktop provides the ability to add HTML to your questionnaires. You can add links to external web pages that participants can use when they answer the questionnaire. Custom HTML can be added to provide even more formatting options for the questionnaire. Inserting HTML links Editing inserted links You can: Changing the link address […]

    The post Using HTML appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Snap XMP Desktop provides the ability to add HTML to your questionnaires. You can add links to external web pages that participants can use when they answer the questionnaire. Custom HTML can be added to provide even more formatting options for the questionnaire.

    Inserting HTML links

    1. Open the survey in the Questionnaire window. Make sure that you are in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png and that the toolbar topic is set to Font.
    2. Select the text to use for the link or place the cursor at the point where you wish to insert the link.
    3. Click Insert and select HTML Field from the menu. This opens the New HTML Field dialog. By default, the selected text appears as the link address.
    4. Edit the text in Web Address to show the web page’s URL, e.g., www.snapsurveys.com.
      • If the address begins www, then the prefix http:// is automatically added.
      • If the address contains an @ symbol, then the prefix mailto: is automatically added.
    New HTML hyperlink
    1. Click OK. The start and end link tags are inserted in the questionnaire around the selected text.
    Question showing the HTML tags

    Editing inserted links

    You can:

    • change the link’s web address
    • change the text and position used as the link anchor
    • delete the link by deleting both the <a href> and </a> tags in the questionnaire

    Changing the link address

    1. Open the survey in the Questionnaire window. Make sure that you are in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png
    2. Double-click the <a href> text in the questionnaire to open the associated Modify HTML field dialog.
    3. Edit the Web address text as required.
    4. Click OK to save your changes.

    Changing the position of a link

    The text used as an anchor for an HTML link is the text between the <a href> and the </a> tags. To change the anchor text, you can either edit the text, or move the tags to a different position.

    1. Open the survey in the Questionnaire window. Make sure that you are in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png
    2. Click the <a href> text in your questionnaire to select it.
    Question showing the HTML tags
    1. Cut the text and paste it in the new position. This moves the associated link with it.
    2. Select the </a> tag and move that as well.
    3. If you delete the </a> tag, you can insert a new one.
      • Click at the end of the text that you want to use as an anchor.
      • Select HTML Field from the Insert menu
      • Select the Hyperlink End Tag radio button in the New HTML Field dialog and click OK.

    Inserting Custom HTML

    You can insert custom HTML such as line breaks (<br>) and other tags in your questionnaire. It is simplest to insert each tag separately. This help does not provide instructions on using HTML.

    1. Open the survey in the Questionnaire window. Make sure that you are in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png and that the toolbar topic is set to Font.
    2. Place the cursor at the point where you wish to insert the link.
    3. Click Insert and select HTML Field from the menu. This opens the New HTML Field dialog. By default, the selected text appears as the link address.
    4. Select Custom HTML.
    New HTML field with custom HTML
    1. Type the HTML that you wish to insert in the HTML box and click OK. The example shows a line break insertion.
    2. The HTML tag shows in the questionnaire. You can edit the tag by double-clicking it to open the dialog box.
    Inserted HTML tag

    If the words contain spaces, you will only see the first word in questionnaire view. The rest of the string is still there and available when you publish to an HTML output.

    The post Using HTML appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adding a Page Timer https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-a-page-timer/ Wed, 10 Mar 2021 16:26:23 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4097 A Page Timer adds a countdown time limit to a page. This can be used to limit the length of time a page is displayed or prevent the participant moving to the next page until a specified amount of time has elapsed. Once the specified time period has elapsed, you can choose whether to move […]

    The post Adding a Page Timer appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    A Page Timer adds a countdown time limit to a page. This can be used to limit the length of time a page is displayed or prevent the participant moving to the next page until a specified amount of time has elapsed.

    Once the specified time period has elapsed, you can choose whether to move the participant onto the next page automatically or allow them to navigate themselves.

    One use of Page Timers is in tests or quizzes, where there is a time limit for answering the question. They can also be used in surveys where respondents need to spend a set time viewing multimedia content such as images, video or audio before moving to the next page.

    You can insert one Page Timer on each page of the questionnaire. If you add more than one, only the first timer in the page displays.

    Inserting the page timer

    1. In the Survey Overview window, open the survey in the Questionnaire window. Make sure the questionnaire is in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png .
    2. Select the question for the Page Timer and set the toolbar topic to Font.
    3. Place the cursor at the point where you wish to insert the Page Timer. This can be as part of a question. It can also be added in its own question; in this case Title, Sub-title or Instruction question styles are the most suitable, as they do not require any response.
    4. Click on the Insert button and select Page Timer from the menu. This opens the Page Timer dialog.
    Page Timer dialog
    1. In Time, set the countdown time. It is shown as minutes and seconds. The default time limit is ten seconds.
    2. Choose whether to display or hide the countdown timer.
    3. Choose whether to disable the Next/Submit navigation buttons until the set time has elapsed. This ensures the participant remains on the page for a set amount of time.
    4. Choose whether to move the participant onto the next page automatically or allow them to navigate themselves.
    5. Click OK. The Page Timer shows the selected time within curly brackets e.g. {00:20}
    6. To edit the time limit, double click on it.
    7. The Page Timer shows the countdown time when the participant completes the questionnaire.

    The post Adding a Page Timer appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using a response property to create a character counter https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-a-response-property-to-create-a-character-counter/ Wed, 10 Mar 2021 16:25:34 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4089 Often, a questionnaire contains questions that invite the participant to enter comments. In an online questionnaire, these questions have a maximum number of characters that the respondent can enter. You can create a character counter to let participants keep track of the comment length. You can choose whether the character counter displays: A character count […]

    The post Using a response property to create a character counter appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Often, a questionnaire contains questions that invite the participant to enter comments. In an online questionnaire, these questions have a maximum number of characters that the respondent can enter. You can create a character counter to let participants keep track of the comment length.

    You can choose whether the character counter displays:

    • the number of characters remaining
    • the total number of characters available
    • the number of characters they have used.

    A character count is added to the survey as a Response property. This feature is only available for Open Ended questions.

    Adding a character counter

    1. Open the survey in the Questionnaire window. Make sure that you are in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png and that the toolbar topic is set to Font.
    2. Place the cursor at the point where you wish to insert the character counter. In the example, the character count is in the footnote of the open-ended question.
    Footnote used for the character counter
    1. Click Insert and select Response Property from the menu. This opens the New embedded response property dialog.
    Inserting a character count into the questionnaire
    1. In Property, select the counter type.
      • Response Count shows the number of characters that the participant has entered
      • Characters Left shows the number of characters remaining in the response. This is the default.
      • Max Count shows the maximum number of characters allowed in the response
    2. Click OK. The counter type is inside curly brackets; {count}, {left} or {max}, to show that it is a text-substituted field.
    Footnote with character counter inserted
    1. When the participant answers the question they will see the character count change as they enter their comments.
    Interview question using a character counter

    Set the maximum length of a response or the size of a response in the question’s Variable properties. By default the maximum length is 9999 characters.

    The post Using a response property to create a character counter appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adding multimedia https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-multimedia/ Wed, 10 Mar 2021 16:25:03 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4095 Video and audio in a survey provides your respondents with more information than you can easily describe in a written question. Showing the participant a variety of media can keep them engaged throughout the questionnaire. Adding video and audio clips to your questionnaire can have many uses including: In Snap XMP Desktop, you can insert […]

    The post Adding multimedia appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Video and audio in a survey provides your respondents with more information than you can easily describe in a written question. Showing the participant a variety of media can keep them engaged throughout the questionnaire.

    Adding video and audio clips to your questionnaire can have many uses including:

    • show a video clip of a new product
    • improve accessibility using audio
    • show a training video clip followed by test questions
    • ask about a preference between different colour schemes in a logo or package design change
    • listening to music in a test or quiz

    In Snap XMP Desktop, you can insert video and audio files into your questionnaire. They can automatically play when the respondent goes to the page or the respondent can select to play them when ready. You can add the media file in both the question and answer text.

    Media attributes

    AttributeDescription
    autoplayPlays the video or audio file automatically when the value is 1 (true) or plays when activated by the participant if the value is 0 (false)
    titleProvides the text shown in the controls tooltip
    heightHeight (in pixels) needed to display the file. This needs to be large enough to display controls for users to play the media file.
    controlsThis determines if the play button and other controls are displayed in the browser. This is set to 1 (true) to show the controls and 0 (false) to hide them. The controls shown are dependent on the browser used.
    buttonThe graphic used to represent an audio file. The selected graphic will not be used if it is a video file.
    widthWidth(in pixels) needed to display the file. This needs to be large enough to display controls for users to play the media file.
    additional attributes Additional attributes can be added at the end of the grid. Some common examples for audio and video are:
    loop repeats the audio or video and is set to 0 (false) or 1 (true).
    muted starts with no sound and is set to 0 (false) or 1 (true).

    Inserting an audio or video file

    1. Open the survey in the Questionnaire window. Make sure that you are in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png and that the toolbar topic is set to Font.
    2. Place the cursor at the point where you wish to insert the audio or video. If you wish to create a question for the media file then the Title, Sub-title or Instruction question styles are the most suitable, as they do not require any response.
    3. Click on the Insert button and select Media Field from the menu. This opens the New media field dialog.
    Add a media file to the questionnaire
    1. In Url or File Path, enter the URL or file path or click Browse to select the file you want to insert.
    2. The Mime Type updates automatically when you select the URL or file path. Change the media type by selecting a different choice in the drop-down. Snap XMP Desktop recognises most multimedia file types.
    3. Set the attributes for the file, as appropriate.
    4. Click OK to add the file. The file shows in the questionnaire. Double-click the file icon to edit the media field.

    Troubleshooting

    If you wish to change the size of the display, or the properties of the media object once you have inserted it, double click the file. This opens the New media field dialog.

    If you have a large media object, it may be too large to embed in the survey and then upload onto a server. In this case you must host the file on a server (or a site such as YouTube) and linking to it using HTML code rather than inserting the file directly. To do this insert a custom HTML field and enter code such as:
    <iframe width=”425″ height=”349″ src=”http://www.youtube.com/embed/aaaaaaaaa” frameborder=”0″ allowfullscreen></iframe>
    in the New HTML Field dialog, replacing the YouTube URL with the appropriate URL.

    The post Adding multimedia appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting images https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-graphics/ Wed, 10 Mar 2021 16:24:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4091 Graphics make a questionnaire more interesting and engaging, helping to improve response rates. Adding your logos and background watermarks provides branding and helps your respondents associate the questionnaire with your organisation. Images make a great alternative to text in questions, such as showing pictures of flags to select a country. In Snap XMP Desktop, graphics […]

    The post Inserting images appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Graphics make a questionnaire more interesting and engaging, helping to improve response rates. Adding your logos and background watermarks provides branding and helps your respondents associate the questionnaire with your organisation. Images make a great alternative to text in questions, such as showing pictures of flags to select a country.

    In Snap XMP Desktop, graphics can be placed in any question text on the questionnaire. This includes the question text, answer text, and the background of the question or page. Snap XMP Desktop supports a number of image file types: bitmaps (.bmp), JPEG (.jpg), PNG (.png) and GIF (.gif).

    Snap Surveys provides a range of images for surveys that you can download and use. These survey images include icons, rating scales and backgrounds.

    Inserting an image

    1. Open the survey in the Questionnaire window. Make sure that you are in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png and that the toolbar topic is set to Font.
    2. Place the cursor at the point where you wish to insert the image.
    3. Click Insert and select Image from the menu. This opens the Insert Image dialog.
    4. In File, select the image file from the list or click Browse to select the file.
    InsertImageDlg.PNG
    1. Use the Zoom control to enlarge or reduce the image. This changes the size of the image shown in your questionnaire. For example, setting the zoom to 50% will mean that the image appears at half the height and half the width.
    2. In Colourize Gif, select the colour, if applicable for the type of image.
    3. In Alt, enter text that describes the image. The browser will show this text as an alternative when it cannot display the image. Adding this improves accessibility as screen readers use this text.
    4. Click OK. The questionnaire now shows the image.
    5. Double click on the image to edit it in the Insert Image dialog.

    Adding a background

    1. Open the survey in the Questionnaire Window. Make sure that you are in Design Mode DesignModeIcon.png 
    2. Select Background in the toolbar topic.
    3. In the next drop down list, select the area to apply the background image. Select (All) for entire question or select (Page) for the questionnaire background.
    4. Click the Picture button. This opens the Picture dialog.
    PictureDlgBlank.PNG
    1. Select the image file from the list or click Browse and browse for the image file.
    2. Specify the alignment and stretch you would like for the image and whether GIFs show color. (Note that you cannot scale picture backgrounds used in online surveys)
    3. In Alt, enter text that describes the image. The browser will show this text as an alternative when it cannot display the image. Adding this improves accessibility as screen readers use this text.
    4. Click OK. The questionnaire now shows the image.

    The post Inserting images appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting automatic survey information https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-automatic-survey-information/ Wed, 10 Mar 2021 16:23:25 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4126 Survey fields allow you to insert information about the survey into your questionnaire. They are often used for information when printing the survey. The current information for the field is substituted when the survey is published. Name Inserts survey file name (defined in Survey properties dialog) Title Inserts survey title (defined in Survey properties dialog) […]

    The post Inserting automatic survey information appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Survey fields allow you to insert information about the survey into your questionnaire. They are often used for information when printing the survey. The current information for the field is substituted when the survey is published.

    1. In the Survey Overview window, open the survey in the Questionnaire window. Make sure you are using Design mode.
    2. Select Font in the topic list.
    FontBar.png
    1. Click the Insert button and select Survey field. This opens the New Survey Field dialog.
    1. Select one of the available survey fields from the Field property drop down list.
    Name Inserts survey file name (defined in Survey properties dialog)
    Title Inserts survey title (defined in Survey properties dialog)
    Page Inserts current page
    Case Inserts current case number
    Cases Insert current number of undeleted cases
    Filter Inserts description of filter in use
    Filter – value Inserts description of the value of the filter in use (defined in variable used to filter)
    Filter – expression Inserts the filter expression in use (as typed)
    Section Insert current section name
    ReportTitle Inserts current report title (defined in Display Name)
    Weight Inserts current weight applied to report
    1. In Modify case, select the case used to display the survey field text. Choose from Normal, UPPER CASE, lower case, Sentence case, Title Case.
    2. Click OK. The field will appear in the survey as the field name enclosed in curly brackets, e.g. {Page}.
    1. When published, this will be replaced by the current field value.

    The post Inserting automatic survey information appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting dynamic text https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-dynamic-text/ Wed, 10 Mar 2021 16:22:53 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4086 Dynamic text (or piping) is a feature in online editions that lets you change text in your questionnaire based on the responses entered by the respondent. This provides a personalized experience as the respondent progresses through the questionnaire. There are many uses for dynamic text: Inserting a previous response into the text In Snap XMP […]

    The post Inserting dynamic text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Dynamic text (or piping) is a feature in online editions that lets you change text in your questionnaire based on the responses entered by the respondent. This provides a personalized experience as the respondent progresses through the questionnaire.

    There are many uses for dynamic text:

    • change the question text based on the responses to previous questions
    • change the answer codes based on the responses to previous questions
    • customize instructions based on the responses to previous questions
    • include text created using a derived variable calculated from a previous response
    • insert system paradata including case number and interview date and time information

    Inserting a previous response into the text

    In Snap XMP Desktop, inserting a Variable field adds dynamic text to the questionnaire. The dynamic text shows in the questionnaire as the variable name in curly brackets {}, for example, {Q1}. The text substitution takes place during the live interview and the respondent sees the dynamic text.

    1. Open the survey in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Position the cursor where the dynamic text will appear.
    1. Set the Topic drop-down to Font as this shows the Insert button.
    1. Click the Insert button and select Variable Field from the menu. This displays the New variable field dialog.
    1. Complete the fields to define the dynamic text:
      • The Variable list contains all the variables and paradata for the questionnaire. Select the variable to insert from the list.
      • In Aspect, select the type of text to insert. There are three aspects to choose from: Reply inserts the question response; Name inserts the question number and Context inserts the current context.
      • In Modify case, choose the case used to display the text: Normal, UPPER CASE, lower case, Sentence case, Title Case.
    1. Click OK. The question number is displayed inside curly brackets, e.g. {Q1}, this will be replaced by the dynamic text when a respondent is answering the questionnaire.
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the changes made to the questionnaire.
    2. You can test the text substitution by publishing the survey and launching a preview in Snap XMP Online.

    Using text substitution automatically adds a page break above its location in the questionnaire. You do not see a page break in the Questionnaire window but the interview process inserts the page break.

    Example of dynamic text

    In this example, an initial multi-response question asks the respondent about their social media use and a subsequent question uses this answer.

    1. The first question asks about social media use and allows multiple responses.
    1. The second question ask a further question about social media use and includes the response to the first question. The dynamic text is inserted with the placeholder {Q1}. If more than one answer is selected in Q1 they will be substituted as a list. This is shown in Step 4.
    1. During the interview the respondent selects three answers in Q1.
    1. When the respondent clicks Next, the next page displays Q2. The answers from Q1 are substituted in Q2 where the {Q1} dynamic text placeholder is positioned.

    The post Inserting dynamic text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Including a consent question https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/including-a-consent-question-snap-desktop/ Mon, 08 Mar 2021 17:03:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4212 Under the GDPR, all organisations must have a documented lawful basis for processing personal data. If you choose to use consent as the basis for collecting and processing survey response data, Snap XMP allows you to provide potential participants with the relevant information that they need to give informed consent, and to configure your survey […]

    The post Including a consent question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Under the GDPR, all organisations must have a documented lawful basis for processing personal data. If you choose to use consent as the basis for collecting and processing survey response data, Snap XMP allows you to provide potential participants with the relevant information that they need to give informed consent, and to configure your survey to obtain the participant’s consent to proceed with the survey.

    Participants choose whether to give consent by answering a specific question at the beginning of the survey.  If they choose not to provide consent they are prevented from completing the survey.

    Provide potential participants with the relevant information

    You need to ensure that the consent that you obtain from participants is ‘informed’, meaning that participants have been given ‘fair processing information’ and have been informed of all aspects of the survey project that are relevant to their decision to participate. This is commonly done by providing potential participants with a privacy or information notice. You can present this information by including it in the instruction question type field at the start of your survey. You have the option of providing this information in a layered format by providing a summary of the essential information in the instruction question type field, followed by a link to your full privacy policy or notice for more detailed information. You are also able to include a link to the Snap Surveys’ Privacy Policy; available at https://www.snapsurveys.com/survey-software/privacy-policy-uk/, for information as to how we act as your data processor.

    In this worksheet example, the question and text are an example of simple wording that may be used as part of the process of gaining consent to the collection of the survey response data and processing it for the purposes of the survey itself. You can set the question and the explanation to include whatever information you as data controller consider appropriate for your survey, the type of data that you propose to collect, and the uses that you propose to make of the survey response data.

    For example, where special categories of personal data will be collected (e.g. gender and ethnicity data) and explicit consent is required, you may wish to include specific wording to make it clear that the participant is willing to provide such information. If you plan to use the response data for other purposes beyond the survey itself, you may also set multiple consent questions, to separately obtain consent for each of them.

    Create a Multi Choice style consent question

    1. Open your survey in the Questionnaire window and Design Mode DesignModeIcon.png , the default, set.
    2. Click into the first title or question field at the top of your questionnaire.
    3. Press Enter to create a new question after this question.
    4. Select the dropdown list on the toolbar change it to Multi Choice. The shape of the response box changes to a square.
    5. Click on the question and press the key combination Ctrl + Shift + B to insert a page break above your new question (alternatively click the right–hand button on the mouse and select Break and Page Break).
    6. In the area marked Click here for text, enter your consent request text.
    Consent question and checkbox in the questionnaire
    1. Add a page break between the consent question and any following question.

    Set the question as a mandatory response

    1. Ensure the consent question is selected and choose Variable Properties  VariablePropsIcon.png from the Questionnaire window toolbar.
    2. In the Must Answer property, select Yes to make the question mandatory.
    Set the selected question as mandatory
    1. Click OK then click Save SaveIcon.png .

    Test the survey

    1. Select File | Publish to display the Publish Questionnaire window.
    2. Select Preview only as the Output Method.
    3. Select Publish. The preview opens a new browser window and displays your survey as it would appear in a web browser immediately after it has been published. Use this previewed survey to test that your consent question behaves accordingly.
    4. In the published version it will look like this.
    Consent message and checkbox in a questionnaire
    1. Check that the consent question appears on a page by itself and must be answered before the participant can complete the rest of the survey.

    Keep a record of consent

    1. In Snap XMP Desktop, click DataEntryIcon.png  to open the Data Entry window.
    2. Select the menu option File | Export to display the Data Export dialog.
    Data export to an Excel file
    1. Select Excel (CSV) as the format.
    2. File should be selected as the Destination – you can use the Browse button to specify where your file will be created.
    3. In the Content field, type the variable name of your consent question and ID.date, ID.time and ID.name.
    4. Click OK.
    5. The file created contains the information required to show that the participant has given consent.

    If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Including a consent question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating an accessible version of your questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-an-accessible-version-of-your-questionnaire/ Mon, 01 Mar 2021 12:01:41 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4067 Accessibility is an important consideration when designing a questionnaire. To ensure everyone is capable of answering questions and having their say, you can create accessible questionnaires in Snap XMP Desktop that conform to Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.2 meeting level AA compliance and Section 508 Standards. By clever design your questionnaires can be accessible […]

    The post Creating an accessible version of your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Accessibility is an important consideration when designing a questionnaire. To ensure everyone is capable of answering questions and having their say, you can create accessible questionnaires in Snap XMP Desktop that conform to Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.2 meeting level AA compliance and Section 508 Standards.

    By clever design your questionnaires can be accessible to Level A success criteria without utilising the additional Accessibility settings. For example here are some points that will aid in achieving this.

    • Include text alternatives for non-text content such as images
    • Choose simple, easy to read fonts.
    • Don’t rely on colour to convey information
    • Ensure foreground and background colours are sufficiently contrasting
    • Use of appropriate images to convey meaning and purpose
    • Avoid inserting content, which cause flickering, blinking or movement effects
    • Link Text for any inserted web links are easy to understand
    • Help users avoid mistakes – use descriptive instructions, error messages and suggestions for correction
    • Insert custom HTML to implement some accessible features e.g. to denote acronyms

    You can also watch the associated webinar that covers how to design an accessible survey.

    Please read our Accessibility Statement that covers further information on the various points referenced in this worksheet.

    Setting the Accessibility options

    In order to produce questionnaires at a higher level of compliance, you need to select publication options that include an additional ‘Plain text’ version. When the survey ispublished with all the available options, it will be compliant to Level AA. In Snap XMP Desktop, you can add the additional accessibility options to your questionnaire.

    1. In Snap XMP Desktop, open your survey from the Survey Overview window.
    2. Click the File | Page Setup menu. This opens the Questionnaire Properties dialog.
    3. In Section, select the Accessibility option.
    4. In the Surveys to Produce list, select Standard and Plain versions.
    5. Select the option for Link from plain text and include some appropriate text. The link text which is chosen should be clear and unambiguous to conform to checkpoint 2.4.4 & 2.4.9.
    Accessibility settings in Questionnaire properties
    1. When your questionnaire is viewed in a browser a link is displayed that allows participants to move between the two versions of the questionnaire.
    2. By default the W3C Accessibility Options for Plain version uses no coloursPlain version has no images and Plain version has no dynamic routing are selected.
    3. You can also select to Use strict rules which provides further options to select in the Details settings. Information on these additional options is included in the list below.
    4. Once you have selected the strict rules options, click OK to return to the Questionnaire Properties dialog.
    5. Click OK to save the Accessibility options.
    6. Publish and test your questionnaire to check that the accessibility options are correct.

    Explanation of the Accessibility Settings

    Surveys to produce

    This option allows you to select how the surveys will be published. The default setting is set by the survey template selected when creating the questionnaire.

    The Standard Version Only option would publish a version of your survey that includes any colour, images and routing that you have applied.

    The Plain Version Only option would publish a version of your survey that removes any colour, images and routing that you have applied.

    The Standard and Plain Versions publishes both versions of the survey.

    Web links

    This option is only available if you have chosen to publish Standard and Plain Versions and creates link(s) at the top of the questionnaire for people to switch between the versions.

    Link to plain text – This places a link to the plain text version at the top of the standard version of the questionnaire. The default is “Text only”

    Link from plain text – This places a link from the plain text version back to the standard version of the questionnaire.

    W3C Accessibility Options

    Plain version uses no colour – the questionnaire appears in black and white, but this doesn’t mean you can’t apply a colour at all. You can apply a colour as long as it is in an appropriate contrast.

    Plain version has no images – no images will be included in the plain version of the questionnaire, however the use of images normally causes no accessibility problems and the use of graphics is even recommended in some cases to make content easier to understand (checkpoint 1.1.1)

    Plain version has no dynamic routing – dynamic content may not satisfy all web accessibility guidelines, for example skipping pages could cause confusion for assisted technologies. It is therefore recommended that a Plain version with no dynamic routing is selected alongside a standard version with dynamic content.

    Strict web accessibility rules

    Strict web accessibility rules

    Position code labels correctly – Would position the code labels and boxes automatically in a single column enabling the assisted technologies to read down the questionnaire.
    Expand Grids – It may be difficult for the assisted technologies to read grids as a grid format goes across the screen and not down. Ticking expand grids reformats the grid so it reads down the questionnaire.
    Use <Fieldset> around questions – this is used to organise the content (checkpoint 2.4.10) by applying a border around the question which allows some assistive technologies to navigate more efficiently and to provide more useful information to respondents.

    fieldset around question
    Use <Fieldset> around grid members – this is for assisted navigation and applies a border around the whole grid question which can aid readability. You can only apply ‘fieldsets’ to grid questions if the option for ‘Expand Grids’ has been selected.

    fieldset
    Explicit tab order – Displays every link and control in the questionnaire in a logical order, however Snap web questionnaires are always arranged in this way, selecting this option will ensure this.
    Access key – This allows you to use a combination of keys on the keyboard to perform the same action as pressing a button. The keyboard combination of Alt+R can be used for the reset button and Alt+S for the submit button. Access keys are no longer required for conformance to WCAG 2.2. Note: There are also some considerations when using keyboard combinations, for example Browser support is limited and they are not generally easy to use as many assistive technologies use many Alt keys combinations for their interfaces.
    Open questions have placeholder text – You can convey the purpose of open ended text boxes in the questionnaire by adding appropriate placeholder text which is displayed inside open text boxes on screen. This placeholder text aids assisted technologies to present or convey the information, structure and relationships of the content on the page.

    Open ended default text

    The post Creating an accessible version of your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Attaching files to a question using AttachIt https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/attaching-files-to-a-question-using-attachit/ Thu, 25 Feb 2021 14:24:28 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=4044 AttachIt is a feature available in online questionnaire editions, such as PC/laptop, mobile and tablet. With AttachIt, you can create a questionnaire that contains one or more AttachIt questions. These questions allow a participant to attach a file as a question response when they are completing the survey. When created in Snap XMP Desktop, the […]

    The post Attaching files to a question using AttachIt appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    AttachIt is a feature available in online questionnaire editions, such as PC/laptop, mobile and tablet. With AttachIt, you can create a questionnaire that contains one or more AttachIt questions. These questions allow a participant to attach a file as a question response when they are completing the survey.

    When created in Snap XMP Desktop, the question can specify the type of file expected where the choice is Photo, Audio or Signature; or specify a file of any type.

    The participant attaches the file during an interview using Snap XMP Online or Interviewer. The file has a unique identifier that connects it to the particular question and response. When the responses are submitted, they can be downloaded as zip files which contain either individual files, all the files, or files grouped by question or response.

    Adding an AttachIt question

    The AttachIt feature is a type of data picker that is added to an open ended question. It allows participants to attach files to their responses.

    1. In Snap XMP Desktop, open the survey in the Questionnaire window and select the online edition of the questionnaire.
    2. Click New Question to create new question which will contain the AttachIt feature.
    3. Select the Open Ended style to create an open ended question. By default, the question requires a literal response. In the question text, it is a good idea to include instructions on how to upload a file.
    4. Select Show in the toolbar topics.
    5. Select Data Picker in the next list then select Show.
    6. Select Attach File instead of Keyboard in the list. If you are creating a mobile survey for use on the Interviewer app, you can select Attach Photo, Attach Signature or Attach Audio. Choosing Audio will provide you with up to 1 hour of recording time. Choosing Signature enables the option for respondents to electronically draw on the touch screen of the mobile device being used for interviewing. Please note that the AttachIt signature is only available on the Interviewer app and not via a browser.
    7. You can change the appearance of the AttachIt icon. Select the icon size to show in the questionnaire; choose from Small, Medium, Large or Extra Large. Select the color to display the icon.
    Attach it question for attaching files
    1. The question is added to all the editions in the questionnaire. However, the AttachIt feature has to be set in each online edition, such as tablet and phone. You may wish to hide the question in any paper editions.

    Setting the picture size for the Interviewer app

    When Attach Photo is used in an Interviewer questionnaire you can set the image size of the attached photos. The file size of an image depends upon the camera used and the how the image is stored. The bigger the image, the more space it takes up on the device and the longer it takes to sync to Snap XMP Online.

    The Interviewer app compresses the image to a fixed size according to the longest dimension. You can keep the original image size by selecting Original.

    1. In the Questionnaire window, click Questionnaire Properties.
    2. In Section, select SOI. This is only available for online editions.
    Set the image size of attached files in Snap Offline Interviewer
    1. Select the required Image size.
    2. Click OK to save your changes.
    3. Click Save to save the changes to the questionnaire.

    Testing the AttachIt question

    The questionnaire must be published before the AttachIt feature can be tested.

    1. In Snap XMP Online, open the survey in Your work. In the survey’s Summary tab, click the Collect link.
    2. In Overview, click the Publish current version button to publish your survey. Click OK to confirm that you want to publish the survey
    Publish current version button
    1. Click the Launch preview button. This opens the questionnaire in a new browser tab.
    Preview a published survey
    1. The test starts with a notice stating that this is a survey preview and responses entered in the preview will not be saved and will not affect the survey results. Click the message” I understand – start the preview” to proceed.
    Attach it question when previewing an interview
    1. Click the Attach File icon. This shows a Select file dialog. Click Choose File to browse for the required file.
    Select the file to attach
    1. In the file browser, select the required file and click Open. A unique reference is shown in the Select file dialog.
    File successfully attached message
    1. Click Close. The unique ID now appears in the question response field. This identifies the attached file as this participant’s response to the question.
    Attached file reference displayed in open ended response
    1. Click Submit to complete the test questionnaire.

    When you have tested the questionnaire, you are ready to start interviewing. When the participant is completing the questionnaire they will attach the file as described in steps 5 to 8.

    Downloading the attached file responses

    When participants have attached files to the response, these files can be downloaded from Snap XMP Online.

    1. In Snap XMP Online, open the survey in Your work. In the survey’s Summary tab, click the Collect link.
    2. In Collect, click Responses then click Attachments. The Attachments menu is only shown when there are attached files available.
    3. Click Download all attachments to download a compressed zip file containing all the attached files.
    Downloading all file attachments
    1. Click the Response ID link to download all the attached files for the response. There may be more than one question with an attached file.
    2. Click the question link to download the attached files for that specific question or the attached file link to download an individual file.

    In Snap XMP Desktop, the reference given to the file attached to the question response is shown in the Data Entry window.

    Usage stats for AttachIt

    In Snap XMP Online, you can see how many AttachIt units your account has used. The number of AttachIt units shows the number of attached files for the surveys running on your account.

    1. In Snap XMP Online, click Your Account.
    2. Click Usage to view the Usage statistics including the AttachIt units.
    3. In Show, choose the time range then click Refresh.
    Usage statistics for attached files

    The post Attaching files to a question using AttachIt appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Setting the response type https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/setting-the-response-type/ Fri, 10 Jul 2020 09:25:13 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1666 When you create a question, a default response type is set for the question style. You can change the response type according to the question style and the requirements of the questionnaire. Multi-choice, Single choice and Grid questions Response Description Multiple A Single Choice, Multi choice or Grid question where the respondent can select one […]

    The post Setting the response type appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    When you create a question, a default response type is set for the question style. You can change the response type according to the question style and the requirements of the questionnaire.

    Multi-choice, Single choice and Grid questions

    Response Description
    Multiple A Single Choice, Multi choice or Grid question where the respondent can select one or more answers.
    Single A Single Choice, Multi choice or Grid question where the respondent can select one answer. For example, Yes/No or Age group questions.

    Open Ended, Open First and Open Next questions

    Response Description
    Quantity The respondent can only enter numbers. The data length defaults to 8 and can be changed using the Variable properties window.
    Literal This allows the respondent to enter free format text such as names and comments. The default length is 100.
    Date This question captures dates in a wide range of formats, entering the day, month and year. This allows different international standards. The maximum length is 20 characters.
    Time This question captures times in either 12 or 24 hour format. You can use a.m. and p.m. suffixes.

    Changing the response type

    1. Select the question required, or a part of the question required. The toolbar will display the response types appropriate to that type of question.
    2. Select Response in the toolbar topic list.
    Setting a multiple response for a multi choice question
    Setting a literal response for an open ended question
    1. Select the appropriate response from those available for that question type.
    2. The respondent can only enter responses of the specified type.

    If you wish to change the response type for all questions using the current style, then click the Set All button. The Set All option is only available in Style mode. This will also set the underlying response type for that particular style so any new questions created with that style would have the same response type.

    The post Setting the response type appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using Styles https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-styles/ Thu, 09 Jul 2020 09:39:52 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1542 Snap XMP comes with a number of question styles. They are all available for use in Snap XMP Desktop. We have developed a sample questionnaire that shows the different question styles. You can use this questionnaire to see how the questions behave in a live interview. Choosing a question style in Design mode When you […]

    The post Using Styles appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Snap XMP comes with a number of question styles. They are all available for use in Snap XMP Desktop. We have developed a sample questionnaire that shows the different question styles. You can use this questionnaire to see how the questions behave in a live interview.

    Choosing a question style in Design mode

    When you are designing the questionnaire in the Questionnaire window, the question style drop-down list shows the most used styles, and a “More Styles” entry at the end of the list. Click this to open the Style Picker, which contains a list of all the available styles.

    You can also access the list by clicking Style Picker StylePickerIcon.png on the Questionnaire toolbar. The Style Picker tool is an easy way of applying a question style to questions in your questionnaire. This tool is only available in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png .

    Temporary Question Styles

    Changes made to a question in Design Mode DesignModeIcon.png will create a new temporary style called “like” followed by the original style name. For example, when you change the style of an Open Ended question, the question changes to “like Open Ended“.

    You can select the type of styles you would like to view in the preview window, by selecting from ‘All Styles’, ‘All Variables’, ‘Named Styles’, ‘Unused Styles’ or ‘Used Styles’ in the Style drop-down list.

    Using Style mode to modify question styles

    Style mode StyleModeIcon.png allows you to make modifications to the styles, whereas Design mode allows you to modify the individual questions. Style mode allows you to make consistent changes to all questions of the same style, without having to make individual question changes.

    The style selection box

    Style selection bar in Style mode
    Style Selection Box Description
    Multi Choice Changes will apply to the selected question and all other questions that use the same style as the selected question. In addition, any styles that are derived from the style of the selected question where settings still remain the same will adopt the changes.
    All ‘Multi Choice’ styles’ Settings will apply to the selected question and all other questions that use the same style as the selected question. In addition, the settings will apply to any questions that use styles derived from the current style. For example, “like multi choice” questions will also change.
    All styles Settings will apply to all styles. The settings will be stored as the default style settings.

    The following rules explains how styles affect other questions according to the value selected in the style selection box:

    • questions that use the same Style as the highlighted question also change
    • questions that are not based on the Style of the highlighted question do not change
    • questions whose Style is based on the selected question’s style only change if the attribute that changed had the same value in both styles

    Based on Styles

    Not all styles behave in the same way when changes are made; some Styles are based on others. In addition to the ten pre-set styles, there is a Default style that is considered the parent style for five of the pre-set styles: Multi Choice, Grid First, Open Ended, Open First, Title and Instruction. In the same way, Title is the parent style for Sub Title.

    The ten pre-set styles are Grid First, Grid Next, Instruction, Multi Choice, Open Ended, Open First, Open Next, Other, Sub Title, and Title.

    All Styles derive from the default, either directly or through other styles as the diagram shows.

    Diagram showing the question styles supplied with Snap Desktop

    Style attributes

    Each Style has Style Attributes which affects a number of different question elements. You can either set the value of each attribute, or it can inherit its value from other styles. The table below shows the full list of Style Attributes.

    Attribute Affects
    Alignment Name, Text, Grid Name, Grid Label, Position, Code Label, Code Value, Data, Code Box, Code Go To, Footnote.
    Background Question Area, Answer Area, Name, Text, Grid Name, Grid Label, Position, Code Label, Code Value, Code Box, Box Area, Code Offset, Code Gutter, Code Verge, Code Go To, Footnote.
    Borders Question.
    Boxes Box Style, Check Mark, Force Square, Drop-down, Image.
    Break Column Break, Page Break, Section Break.
    Columns Number, Arrangement, Full width.
    Find Find, Next, Previous, Find and Replace.
    Font Name, Text, Grid Name, Grid Label, Position, Code Label, Code Value, Data, Check Mark, Code Go To, Footnote.
    Margins Name, Text, Grid Name, Grid Label, Position, Code Label, Code Value, Data, Check mark, Code Go To, Footnote.
    Numbering Number Format.
    Positions Question, Code Box.
    Response Response Type.
    Show Name, Text, Grid Name, Grid Label, Position, Code Label, Code Box, Code Leaders, Code Value, Space Before, Code Go To, Footnote, Line Before, Semantic Scale, Grid Leaders, As Drop-down, as Map Control, as Slider Control.
    Tabs Name, Text, Grid Label, Code Offset, Code Gutter, Code Verge, Code Values, Code Go To, Open Label.

    The Question Elements

    The Style of a question defines its appearance in the questionnaire for each of its different Elements (see table below). You can change the location or format of each element in the questionnaire.

    ElementDescription
    Answer Area The background area around the answer box and label.
    Box Area The area around the answer code box.
    Code Box The checkbox for a multi- or single-response closed question or the text box for an open-ended question.
    Code GoTo Space for questionnaire routing instructions based on a response to the question.
    Code Gutter The spacing between columns, used with the Tabs and Background topics.
    Code Label The text describing a response for a question.
    Code Leader Markings between the Code Label and the Code Box to show their association, used in paper editions only.
    Code Offset The space to the left of the answer code, used with the Tabs and Background topics.
    Code Value The numerical value assigned to a response.
    Code Verge The space to the right of the answer code box, used with the Tabs and Background topics.
    Footnote A box located below or beside each question, used to display additional text.
    Grid Label The text describing a grid row.
    Grid Leader Markings between the Grid Label and the Grid Box to show their association, used in paper editions only.
    Grid Name The number of the grid row.
    Line Before A line inserted before a question, used with the Show topic.
    Name The question number in the questionnaire.
    Open Label The space used for the code label on open questions, used with the Tabs and Background topic.
    Question Area The background area around the question text, used with the Background topic.
    Space Before Space added before a question, used use with the Show topic.
    Text The question text.

    Organising the question styles

    The Style Organiser tool allows you to view the styles you have used within the questionnaire. Style Organiser is only available in Style mode StyleModeIcon.png and can be used to sort styles, as well as rename and make copies of styles.

    In Style mode StyleModeIcon.png , clicking the Style Properties button VariablePropsIcon.png. This opens the Style Properties dialog for the selected question style, where you can change the style name, based on style and the question that can follow this style.

    You can save the question styles as a Style Template so that you can use them in other questionnaires. This helps to create questionnaires with consistent branding.

    The post Using Styles appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Languages https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/languages/ Wed, 08 Jul 2020 12:40:31 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1514 You can also use the Editions button to add another language version to your questionnaire. This means that you can use the same questionnaire in a number of languages, such as English, French and Spanish; and to adapt the style and language of one questionnaire to make it appropriate for sub-groups, such as UK-English and […]

    The post Languages appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can also use the Editions button EditionsIcon.png to add another language version to your questionnaire. This means that you can use the same questionnaire in a number of languages, such as English, French and Spanish; and to adapt the style and language of one questionnaire to make it appropriate for sub-groups, such as UK-English and USA-English or children and adults.

    Adding a language

    1. With the Questionnaire window open, click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
    2. Click the Language button. The Languages dialog appears showing all languages currently associated with the questionnaire.
    Languages dialog
    1. Check the Swap keyboard layouts box to make Snap automatically change to the appropriate keyboard setting for that language. This can be useful for language specific symbols but can be difficult for anyone used to a particular keyboard layout.
    2. Click Add. This displays the Define Language dialog.
    Define language dialog
    1. Using the drop-down list, select the language you want in the Name drop-down list or select the abbreviation for the language you want in the Language drop-down list.
    2. If you want to use a language that is not in the list you can overtype the text to create a custom language.
    3. Click Dictionary if you wish to set a dictionary for use with the spell checker for that language.
    4. Click OK to save and return to the Editions and Style Templates window which now shows all the editions with the associated languages.
    Using the Editions and Style Templates to add a new language
    1. If you do not wish to use each language with every edition, uncheck the tick box beside the language. If this box is clear, that edition will not be displayed in the questionnaire window and will not be published when you publish the questionnaire.
    2. Click OK to return to the Questionnaire window.

    You can toggle between the language editions by

    • clicking on the tabs at the bottom of the screen
    • using Alt + PageUp and Alt + PageDown to switch between the tabs
    Tabs used to switch to a different edition

    If you are publishing a right–to-left language (such as Arabic) survey you may wish to add custom HTML to each of the survey pages to ensure that open response boxes are also right-to-left. E.g.

    <style>

    input {text-align:right !important;}

    textarea{text-align:right !important;}

    </style>

    Changing a language

    1. If you need to change a language that is already specified for a questionnaire, click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
    2. Click Language to open the Languages dialog box.
    Languages dialog
    1. Click Edit. This opens the Define Language dialog.
    Define language dialog
    1. Click OK to save the changes.

    If you have already translated questions into the first language, and you then change the language, the translation text will remain in the previous language. You will have to re-translate the text into the new language.

    Adding a new question in multiple languages

    SurveyPaks can contain multiple language versions of the same questions. Completed multi-language surveys will also contain versions of the questions for all the languages in the survey.

    If you have a survey created in one or more languages, and you have a survey or SurveyPak containing translated questions in those languages, you can add these saved questions to the surveys, and the correct language version of the question will be added to all the different language versions in your current survey.

    For example, if you have an existing survey that has been created in English and Arabic, and you wish to re-use the questions in another English and Arabic survey.

    1. Create the correct language version(s) of your survey.
    2. Open the reference window and find the survey or SurveyPak containing the questions and the translations of those questions that you want.
    3. Drag the question from the reference window into your survey.
    4. The same question will appear in all language versions of your survey, in the appropriate language.

    Adding a derived variable in multiple languages

    If you are using a derived variable codes or labels in your questionnaire or analyses, you need to provide versions of them for all the languages that you are using.

    For example, if you have an existing survey that has been created in English and German, and you are using a derived variable to put an appropriate greeting in the questionnaire text.

    1. Create the derived variable in one language.
    2. Select the other language from the drop-down list at the top right.
    Selecting the language used for a question
    1. Write the labels for the variable and codes for your derived variable in the new language.
    2. Repeat for any other languages.
    3. Click SaveIcon.png to save the variable

    Using the automatic translation

    If you have added questions to your survey, and you then add a new language, you can automatically translate the questions if the translation already exists in a SurveyPak or a survey.

    1. Open the Questionnaire window.
    2. Open the Reference window and browse for the survey or SurveyPak containing the translated questions.
    3. Click the Questionnaire window to make that the active window and select File|Translation. The translation wizard opens.
    4. Select Translate from Reference from the Action menu. Click Next>.
    5. Select the language to translate from (reference language) and to (translation language) in the drop-down lists.
    6. Check the Complete variables only box if you wish only to use translations of complete questions. Uncheck the box if you want to translate partial questions where the automatic translator finds matching parts of a question (for example, Yes and No).
    7. Check the Overwrite existing content box if you wish to overwrite and translated text which is already present in your survey. Clear the box if you want to preserve any existing translated text.
    8. Click Start.
    9. When the translation has finished, a translation report is displayed. You can save this to a file or print it by clicking the Send To… button.
    10. Inspect the translated version of your survey. Questions or parts of questions which have not been translated will display the original language in grey.

    Viewing variables available in other languages

    1. Click ReferenceIcon.png or press Alt+F12 to open the Reference window. Select the survey or SurveyPak containing the questions you are interested in.
    2. Select the language of your choice in the drop-down list. If the language is not visible in the list, then it is not available in the stored survey or SurveyPak. If a specified language has not been added to the current open survey, its name will be greyed out in the language list. You can still select it and examine the questions.
    3. Questions that are available in the chosen languages will be displayed.

    If the current open survey is multi-language, and questions in the SurveyPak are not available in all the languages used in the survey, then those questions will be in grey. Questions available in all languages used in the survey are in black.

    Using an external translator

    If you do not already have translations of your survey questions, you will need to get the survey translated. The most common process of doing this, is to export a text file containing the questions to be translated, and ask the translators to provide matched translations in the specified format.

    Exporting the source file for translation

    1. Open your survey in Design mode
    2. Select File|Translation. The translation wizard opens.
    3. Select Prepare External Translation from the Action drop down list.
    4. Click Next>.
    5. Specify how you wish your translation file to be created in the Translation Wizard Export dialog.
    Using the Translation wizard to export a language for translation
    1. If you already have translated some of the questions, export to a Reference with a matched translation. This creates two files, one with the list of text to be translated, and one with the list of texts that have been translated with gaps for untranslated text. If you do not have any existing translation, you can create a Reference file only.
    2. Specify the Reference Language (the language that will be translated) and the name of the file where the list of texts will be saved. By default, the file name is the survey filename with a .txt suffix.
    3. If you are creating a matched translation, specify the Translation Language (the language that your text will be translated into) and the name of the file where the list of existing translation texts will be saved. Ensure that this is a different file name to the reference language file name.
    4. Check the Omit repeated content box to limit the number of texts that are saved in the translation file. This omits duplicates of complete questions, instructions and labels (such as “Other”).
    5. Uncheck the Omit undefined translations if available (this is used when you are exporting a translated survey for use in translating other surveys).
    6. Check the Omit defined translations if you are creating a single file. This leaves out phrases which have already been translated. (If you are not sure about your existing translations, clear this box to ensure that all the survey text will be translated).
    7. Click Start to start the export. When the export has finished, a translation report is displayed. You can save this to a file or print it by clicking the Send To button.

    Importing your translated file

    When you receive your translated text file, check it to ensure that it matches the format of the exported file. If you are content, you can then use it to translate your survey.

    1. Open your survey in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png .
    2. Select File|Translation. The translation wizard opens. Select Apply External Translation from the Action list.
    3. Click Next>. The translation wizard import dialog appears.
    4. Select the language in the survey that you are translating from. You would normally use the text file that you previously exported as the Reference Language file.
    5. Specify the language that you are translating to as the Translation Language. Select the file that you have received from your translator as the File name.
    6. Check the Complete variables only box if you wish only to use translations of complete questions.
    7. Uncheck the box if you want to translate partial questions where the automatic translator finds matching strings or words (for example, Yes and No).
    8. Check the Overwrite existing content box if you wish to overwrite any translated text which is already present in your survey. Clear the box if you want to preserve any existing translated text.
    9. Click Start.
    10. When the translation has finished, a translation report is displayed. You can save this to a file or print it by clicking the Send To… button.
    11. Inspect the translated version of your survey. Questions or parts of questions which have not been translated will display the original language in grey.

    Saving your survey translation

    If you have a translated survey, you can save it as a set of translated files that you can import directly, as well as opening it in the Reference window.

    1. Open the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select File|Translation. The translation wizard opens.
    3. Select Prepare External Translation from the Action menu.
    4. Click Next>.
    5. Specify how you wish your translation files to be saved in the translation wizard export dialog.
    Using the Translation wizard to export a language for translation
    1. Export to a Reference with a matched translation. This creates two files, one with the list of text to be translated, and one with the list of texts that have been translated.
    2. Specify the Reference Language (the language that will be translated) and the name of the file where the list of texts will be saved. By default, the file name is the survey filename with a .txt suffix.
    3. Specify the Translation Language (the language that your text will be translated into) and the name of the file where the list of existing translation texts will be saved. Ensure that this is a different file name to the reference language file name.
    4. Check the Omit repeated content box to limit the number of texts that are saved in the translation file. This omits repeated phrases (such as “Other”).
    5. Check the Omit undefined translations. This means that you will only export the questions which have been translated.
    6. Click Start to start the export. When the export has finished, a translation report is displayed. You can save this to a file or print it by clicking the Send To… button.
    7. You can then use the translation wizard to import the matched files into another survey with the same questions.

    The post Languages appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Multi-Mode design https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/multi-mode-design/ Wed, 08 Jul 2020 12:33:46 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1476 You can output the same questionnaire in different output formats and languages. The structure of the questionnaire remains the same for each mode, but the appearance, language and the published output will be different for each mode. Output formats Language versions Translation Editions Edition list Check the box by an edition to include it when […]

    The post Multi-Mode design appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can output the same questionnaire in different output formats and languages. The structure of the questionnaire remains the same for each mode, but the appearance, language and the published output will be different for each mode.

    • The name and structure of the variables in each survey will be exactly the same and will be repeated throughout each edition of the questionnaire.

    Output formats

    • For each output format of the questionnaire (paper, screen etc) you can use a different style template.
    • You can show/hide different questions for different outputs
    • You can apply different paragraph styles to the same question in different output formats
    • You can have different questionnaire layouts for the different output formats
    • The output edition is identified in the Id.format variable.
    • The selected edition is published unless it is an adaptive survey

    Language versions

    • You can create several versions of the same language if you wish to have different text in your questions (for example for adults and children)
    • The same paragraph styles are applied to the same questions in different language editions
    • The language version is identified in the Id.language paradata
    • All language editions for an output format are published together.

    Translation

    • The questionnaire text is displayed on each language version. If you have not added a pre-translated question, the original language text will be displayed in grey and will not appear in the published version. You must type the translation over the top of it.
    • Snap XMP Desktop has a bank of standard phrases, such as No Reply, Not Asked, in each language available for use. Other language translations need to be added to the survey.
    • Some SurveyPaks contain questions in several languages, and when you import them, all the language versions will be imported into the correct place.
    • The translation wizard is used to provide text for external translators. The translated text can be imported and used in your questionnaire.

    Editions

    Editions and Style Templates
    Edition list Check the box by an edition to include it when you publish your questionnaire, uncheck the box to remove it.
    New Create a new output edition. Questionnaire has same structure and text but different properties
    Language Open the languages dialog to create a new language edition (one per output edition). Questionnaire can have different text but same structure and properties
    Delete Delete selected edition. This is only available if survey has never been published.
    Rename Change the name of the selected edition (you cannot change the language tag)
    Load Load one of the style templates (.qsf file) supplied with Snap according to which boxes are checked
    Save Save the current questionnaire styles to a template file.
    Copy Copy the current styles to the Clipboard. This is often used to transfer styles between surveys.
    Paste Paste styles from the Clipboard.
    Page setup Check to use portrait/landscape, page size etc
    Colours Check to load the colours of questions/backgrounds and images
    Layout Load the question styles and the layout (number of columns and width of margins etc.)

    Adding an edition

    1. With the Questionnaire window open, click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog box.
    2. The dialog will display any editions of the questionnaire that currently exist.
    3. Select New from the Edition area of the screen. A New Survey Edition dialog box will display.
    Creating a new edition
    1. Enter an edition name to appear on the edition tab that identifies this edition. If you choose a name that already exists within the questionnaire, an error message is displayed.
    2. Select the publication medium details from the drop-down list. The choices are Snap Online, Paper and Scanning.
    3. Select which current edition to copy styles from, or select a template to load styles from.
    4. Click OK.
    5. The new edition of the questionnaire will have been added to the list on the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
    6. Click OK to return to the Questionnaire window.
    7. You can toggle between the various editions by
    • clicking on the tabs at the bottom of the screen
    • using Alt +PageUp and Alt +PageDown to switch between the tabs
    Tabs used to switch to a different edition
    1. If you have multiple languages in your questionnaire, the new edition will include a tab for each language.

    Deleting an edition

    1. You can only delete editions from unpublished questionnaires. Once you have published a questionnaire, you cannot delete any editions from it, even if you have added them after the questionnaire was published.
    2. Open the Questionnaire window.
    3. Click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
    4. Select the edition you wish to delete and click Delete.
    5. This displays a message to confirm that you want to delete. Click Yes.
    6. Click OK to return to the questionnaire.

    Hiding an edition

    You can always hide editions. Hidden editions are not visible in the Questionnaire window and will not be published.

    1. Click EditionsIcon.png in the Questionnaire window to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
    2. Displayed editions have a check mark in the box next to them. To hide an edition, uncheck the box.
    3. Click OK to return to the questionnaire. The hidden edition(s) will no longer be listed in the edition tabs at the bottom of the pane.

    Renaming an edition

    1. Open the Questionnaire window.
    2. Click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
    3. Select the edition you wish to rename and click Rename.
    4. The Format Name dialog opens displaying the current name. Change the name to the one you require and click OK.
    5. Click OK to return to the questionnaire.

    Setting up an adaptive questionnaire

    You can set up a survey so that different devices can see different versions of the questionnaire, tailored for their screen size.

    To do this you need to create separate online editions for each output (for example, for PC, tablet and smartphone) and all editions will be published together.

    How it works

    The largest questionnaire that will fit on the screen for a given device is chosen for the interview. The dimensions are set in Page properties for an edition and the screen size of the device. This means that if you have a phone with a very large screen, it may receive the edition for a tablet.

    Setting up the different editions

    1. Open your survey in the Questionnaire window by clicking QuestionnaireIcon.png . Select Design Mode using the DesignModeIcon.png icon.
    2. Click the Editions and Style Templates icon EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
    3. Click New to create a new edition.
    Creating a new edition for an adaptive questionnaire
    1. Enter a name for the new edition in Edition Name. The name must be unique for the survey.
    2. Select Snap Online from the Publication Medium dropdown.
    3. Select Load Style to choose a new style template for the layout of the questionnaire.
    4. There are a number of supplied style templates in the drop down list. Select
      • Default Smartphone.qsf to access the template for a smartphone
      • Default Tablet.qsf to access the template for a tablet survey
      • Default Web.qsf to access the template for an online browser survey
      • Default Kiosk.qsf to access the template for a kiosk survey
    5. There are other color themed style templates available in the drop down list. You can also browse for styles by clicking the browse_slider button.
    6. Click OK to close the New Survey Edition dialog.
    7. Click OK to return to the Questionnaire window. The new edition will now be visible in the Questionnaire Window.

    Laying out the questionnaires for different devices

    The editions can differ in the way they look and the way they are laid out, but their variables, routing and the publishing settings must remain the same. (Publishing settings include the Interview, Paradata and Data link details).

    You can choose to show or hide different items in the different editions. This allows you to tailor the text and images according to the edition. You can add extra page breaks to reduce scrolling on small screens.

    You can also provide routing that is dependent on which edition you are in, so the questionnaire can route to the appropriate questions in the different editions. You can do this by routing on the ID.format variable.

    You can also make the following changes to all your questionnaires which will improve the experience on small screens and mobile devices

    • Keep the text of questions and the codes as brief as possible.
    • Split large grid questions into several smaller grids to make them quicker to load

    Laying out a questionnaire for a small screen

    Smartphones have limited screen space, a mobile internet connection (which may use a slow speed) and small keyboards. When creating a questionnaire for a smartphone you should:

    • Have ten or fewer questions (you can hide extra questions)
    • Have few or no open response questions (you can hide them if necessary)
    • Use small or no graphics (put any graphics in the background)
    • Have one or two questions per page (to reduce the need to scroll)
    • Turn off the progress bar to reduce clutter on the display
    • Choose simple or no images for response boxes (done automatically if you are using the default smartphone template)
    • Turn off the option of having the title on every page.
    • Choose buttons which look good when small.
    • If you have more than a few codes for a question put multiple response questions into two columns to save space, and reduce the tab settings on the question codes to give more space for labels
    • Use the drop-down list option for single response questions (done automatically if you are using the default smartphone template)
    • Use the drop-down list option instead of a slider or a map control if the survey is likely to be seen on old devices with little memory

    Showing and hiding questions

    If you want to have less text in one edition of your survey, you can provide different versions of the text, and show the one that is appropriate for that edition.

    1. Create the different instructions or questions.
    2. Right-click the item you wish to hide and select Hide Variable in the dropdown list.
    Question that is hidden in the selected edition
    1. Change to the other editions by selecting the appropriate tab at the bottom of the screen.
    Tabs used to switch to a different edition
    1. Repeat the process to hide the text or questions that you do not want in each edition.
    2. Click SaveIcon.png to save the changes to the questionnaire.

    Remember that you will need to change the routing if you route through hidden questions.

    Showing and hiding questions using ID.format

    You can choose which questions are displayed using routing based on the ID.format variable.

    You need to look at the ID.format variable to see the code for an edition.

    1. Click VariablesIcon.png on the main toolbar to display the Variables window.
    2. Scroll to find the ID.format variable and double-click to open it.
    ID.Format Variable Details
    1. Take note of which Code represents which edition.

    Setting up the routing

    1. Create the different questions.
    2. Select the one you wish to appear in that edition.
    3. Right-click the mouse and select Routing Rules from the context menu or click RoutingIcon.png on the Questionnaire window toolbar. The Routing Rules dialog appears
    Routing rules dialog
    1. Click Add to create a new routing rule. Select Conditionally Ask Question from the Type box and click OK. The Rule Details dialog appears.
    Setting a routing rule that shows a question in one edition only
    1. Type ID.format=1 (replacing 1 with the Code representing your edition). This means that the question will be shown if the questionnaire format is the Snap Online edition in the survey in this worksheet.
    2. Click SaveIcon.png to save the changes to the questionnaire.

    Remember that you will need to change the routing if you hide any questions that have routing on or are being routed to.

    Setting up different graphics for different editions

    If you want to use separate graphics for different devices, you must do this by placing them in the background, rather than inserting them directly.

    It is best to create separate images of the correct size, rather than attempting to resize the graphic.

    1. Create the different graphics that you wish to use for the large and small screens.
    2. Check that the Questionnaire Window is in Design Mode DesignModeIcon.png and that the toolbar topic is set to Background.
    Setting the background for an edition
    1. Select the area that you wish to have a background image in the third drop-down list (highlighted above). Click the Picture button. The Picture dialog appears.
    2. Click Browse and browse for the appropriate picture file for that edition.
    3. Set the horizontal and vertical alignment.
    4. Select Fixed. This ensures that the image will appear at the size you have created it.
    Adding a graphic to an edition
    1. Change to the other edition and repeat with a different picture in the background.
    2. Click SaveIcon.png to save the changes to the questionnaire.

    If you have applied a color and an image, the color will be displayed in areas where the image does not fill the space. The background preview area on the toolbar will be split showing the color alone on the top half.
    EditionToolbar2.PNG

    Publishing an adaptive questionnaire

    If you wish to preview your questionnaire, you will only see a preview of the edition that you publish from. To preview all the editions, you will need to do a Preview only publish from each edition before publishing the questionnaire.

    Previewing all the editions

    1. Open your survey in the Questionnaire window by clicking QuestionnaireIcon.png . Select Design Mode using the DesignModeIcon.png icon.
    2. Select File | Publish or click PublishIcon.png to display the Publish Questionnaire dialog.
    3. In Method, select Preview Only. This opens the default web browser on the device displaying the questionnaire as it would appear during a live interview.
    4. Click Publish to preview that edition of your questionnaire on the desktop. Check that you have chosen the correct questions and images for that edition. Check that any routing works.
    5. Repeat the preview on different devices to check that each edition displays as expected.

    Selecting which editions to publish

    If you do not wish to publish all the editions, hide the editions that are not required. Hidden editions are not visible in the Questionnaire window and will not be published.

    1. Click EditionsIcon.png in the Questionnaire window toolbar to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
    2. Displayed editions have a check mark in the box next to them. To hide an edition, uncheck the box.
    3. Click OK to return to the questionnaire. The hidden edition(s) will no longer be listed in the edition tabs at the bottom of the pane and will not be published.

    Publishing all editions

    1. Select File | Publish.
    2. Select Publish Without Preview as the Output Method.
    3. Click Publish to publish the survey.

    Adjusting screen sizes for adaptive questionnaires

    If you wish to create questionnaires for specific devices, you should check that the questionnaires look as expected on those devices.

    If the devices have a very large or very small screen, you may wish to change the questionnaire page size to fit the expected screen size.

    Note that if you change the screen size for one edition, it may affect which of the other questionnaires is delivered to a device.

    1. Change to the edition displaying the questionnaire for that device.
    2. Click QuestionnairePropsIcon.png to display the Questionnaire Properties dialog.
    3. Select the Page section PublishPage.PNG in the left hand column.
    4. Specify the width of the screen of the device that you are using in Width. The screen width will be different if the device in held in landscape and portrait mode, so choose the appropriate value.
    Setting the screen or page size
    1. Click OK to save your changes

    The post Multi-Mode design appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adding a data picker to enter responses https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-a-data-picker-to-enter-responses/ Wed, 08 Jul 2020 12:11:43 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1468 If you are creating a questionnaire to be delivered online, you can create an on-screen clock, calendar, keyboard, or numeric keypad that respondents can use to enter their answers. These are known as Data Pickers. When your survey is published, an icon is displayed by the response box. The respondent clicks on the icon to […]

    The post Adding a data picker to enter responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    If you are creating a questionnaire to be delivered online, you can create an on-screen clock, calendar, keyboard, or numeric keypad that respondents can use to enter their answers. These are known as Data Pickers. When your survey is published, an icon is displayed by the response box. The respondent clicks on the icon to open the Data Picker.

    Types of Data Picker

    The type of Data Picker displayed depends on the response type of the question.

    • Date questions display calendar Data Pickers
    Date data picker used to enter date responses
    • Time questions display clock Data Pickers
    Time data picker used to enter time responses
    • Literal questions display keyboard Data Pickers
    Keyboard data picker used to enter literal responses
    • Quantity questions display keypad Data Pickers
    Numeric data picker used to enter numeric responses

    Adding a Data Picker to a question

    1. In the Questionnaire window, select the open response question that you wish to provide a Data Picker for.
    2. Select Show in the toolbar topics, then select Data Picker in the drop-down list, and check the Show box.
    3. Adjust the color and size of the Data Picker icon using the dropdown lists (the defaults depend on the edition).
    4. An icon representing the type of Data Picker used appears to the left of your question
    5. Double click on the Data Picker icon to edit the color and size.
    Example of a question that uses a data picker

    When you publish the questionnaire, a Data Picker icon appears next to the response box. When the respondent clicks on the icon, an appropriate Data Picker appears.

    The post Adding a data picker to enter responses appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using a Slider Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-a-slider-control/ Wed, 08 Jul 2020 12:05:13 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1445 A Slider Control lets the respondent select a response by dragging the slider to the position on the bar that represents their response. This can be choosing from a range of quantity values, such as a score from 0 to 10, or from a number of choices, such as Very good to Very poor. Displaying […]

    The post Using a Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    A Slider Control lets the respondent select a response by dragging the slider to the position on the bar that represents their response. This can be choosing from a range of quantity values, such as a score from 0 to 10, or from a number of choices, such as Very good to Very poor.

    Displaying a question as a Slider Control

    You must first create a single-response question, such as Single Choice, Grid or Semantic Scale, or an open-ended quantity question, which you can display as a slider control.

    1. Select the question in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select Show in the topics drop-down list.
    1. Select As Slider Control in the next drop-down.
    1. Select the Show checkbox to change the question to a Slider Control. Clear the Show checkbox to return to the original question style. The question changes to a grey box for the question. If a Slider Control has been previously defined for this question, that Slider Control is shown.
    2. Double-click the Slider Control area to open the Slider Control wizard. This shows the available Slider Control templates. Click the Advanced button for further options in the Slider Control wizard.

    Examples

    Slider Control for single-response questions

    Slider Control for quantity questions

    Customising the Slider Control templates

    The post Using a Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating Drag and Drop questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-a-drag-and-drop-question/ Wed, 08 Jul 2020 09:24:59 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=778 In Snap XMP Desktop, grid questions can be displayed as a drag and drop questions, where answers can be selected by being dragged and dropped into the appropriate position. There are two types of Drag and Drop grids; Rank and Categorize. Drag and Drop for ranking You will now be able to rank answer options […]

    The post Creating Drag and Drop questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In Snap XMP Desktop, grid questions can be displayed as a drag and drop questions, where answers can be selected by being dragged and dropped into the appropriate position. There are two types of Drag and Drop grids; Rank and Categorize.

    • Rank allows the respondent to rank or rate the options provided by dragging and dropping them into an ordered list, for example order of most favorite.
    • Categorize allows the respondent to drag and drop options into specific categories or groups.

    Drag and Drop for ranking

    1. Select a Grid First question.
    2. Please note that the grid must contain the same number of grid code labels as the number of ranks or categories that you need, before converting the grid to a drag and drop question.
    3. Select Show in the Toolbar Topic list
    4. Select As Drag and Drop in the next drop down menu and check the Show box
    source-and-target-panel.gif
    1. Ensure Rank is selected in the adjacent drop down menu
    2. The question layout changes to two panels. A Source panel on the left and a Target panel on the right.
    3. Select the Options button if you wish to add a background colour to each of the panels.

    You will now be able to rank answer options by placing them into an ordered list on the grid.

    Drag and Drop for categorizing

    1. Select a Grid First question
    2. Select Show in the Toolbar Topic list
    3. Select As Drag and Drop in the next drop down menu and check the Show box
    4. Ensure Categorize is selected in the adjacent drop down menu
    5. The question layout changes to two panels. A Source panel on the left and a Target panel on the right.
    6. Select the Options button if you wish to add a background colour to each of the panels.

    You will now be able to categorize answer options by placing them into different boxes on the grid.

    The chosen Grid First question must be set to single response for use with Drag and Drop.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Creating Drag and Drop questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the question boxes https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-question-boxes/ Wed, 08 Jul 2020 09:14:39 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1416 The boxes available in Snap XMP Desktop depend on the type of question and the edition of the questionnaire. The boxes available for multi-choice questions are displayed in the drop down list next to the Boxes toolbar topic. If you are able to design your own boxes for a question, you can select Image in […]

    The post Changing the question boxes appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The boxes available in Snap XMP Desktop depend on the type of question and the edition of the questionnaire.

    The boxes available for multi-choice questions are displayed in the drop down list next to the Boxes toolbar topic. If you are able to design your own boxes for a question, you can select Image in this list.

    Using an image for the check box

    You can change the border style and colour and the size and position of the answer box for a literal question.

    Using the default boxes

    The standard box used in a questionnaire designed in Snap XMP Desktop is a https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/582.gif for both multi choice questions and open-ended questions. These can be easily changed at the level of the entire questionnaire, at the level of question styles, or at the level of individual questions.

    • To change a box for a single question, work in Design Mode DesignModeIcon.png
    • To change the boxes for all questions in a style or all styles, work in Style Mode StyleModeIcon.png
    1. Select the question that you wish to alter and change the toolbar topic to Boxes.
    2. Ensure the Style Selection Box is set to the appropriate choice so all questions set to the same style will have the boxes altered.
    3. Select a new box shape from the images drop down list.

    Snap XMP Desktop only displays the box styles appropriate for the document edition you are using.

    Displaying multi-choice questions as drop down lists

    In the web based editions of a questionnaire, you can display a multi-choice question as:

    • labelled boxes
    • a drop down list

    The Drop-down option is most suitable for Single Response questions, as the Multiple Response version requires use of the Ctrl key on the keyboard to make multiple selections.

    By default

    • Single Response questions are converted to radio buttons to force the respondent to choose only one answer.
    • Multiple Response questions use standard square check boxes so the respondent can make any number of choices.

    To switch between the drop down list or boxes:

    1. Select the style topic Show
    2. Select the value As Drop-down
    3. Check the Show box to use the drop down and clear the Show box to use boxes
    4. The question appears differently in the Questionnaire window and the Web browser.

    In the Questionnaire window

    Drop down style for a multi choice question in design mode

    In the Web Browser

    Drop down style for a multi choice question in preview

    Changing the answer box for Open Ended questions

    Open ended or literal response boxes provide a space where the respondent can enter free format data.

    You can change the size, border and position of the answer box for an open ended question.

    Changing the size

    The size of a literal response box can be fixed or proportional. If it is fixed, it is defined by the number of characters it can contain. Fixed box sizes are useful for paper questionnaires and for questions where the answer is of a known length, for example, a date. Proportional boxes are useful for questionnaires displayed on screen, where you do not know the size of the screen used, which could be a smart phone, kiosk or monitor.

    You can switch between the Fixed and Scaled box sizes. It may be simplest to set a fixed box size and then convert it.

    Setting a fixed box size

    1. Select Boxes in the toolbar topics list at the top of the questionnaire window.
    2. Set Size to Fixed.
    Using a fixed box size for an open ended question
    1. Change the Size value. Note that this essentially gives the box area, so if the box is in a narrow space; it expands downwards so all the characters will fit in.

    Setting a proportional box size

    1. Set Size to Scaled.
    Using a scaled box size
    1. Set the % value to the percentage of available space to use.
    2. Set rows to the number of lines in the box. This determines the box height.

    Changing the position relative to the question

    The response box can be below the question text or to the right of the question text.

    1. Select Positions in the toolbar topics list
    Setting the position of the question name, code box and footnote
    1. Select Beside to put the response box to the right of the question. The question text and response box spaces will get narrower to fit them both into the space.

    Changing the border style and colour

    1. Select Boxes in the toolbar topics list.
    Using the Style button
    1. Click Style. The Box Style dialog opens.
    Setting the box style and color
    1. Select the box colours and border style that you would like.

    Specifying a graphic to use as a box

    Snap XMP Desktop comes with some pre-defined image files for check boxes and radio buttons. These are in pairs, providing both an empty and a selected version of each graphic.

    You can:

    • use the pre-defined pairs of Snap XMP Desktop box graphics
    • combine the Snap XMP Desktop box graphics into different pairs
    • use your own graphics
    1. Select the question that you wish to alter and change the toolbar topic to Boxes.
    2. Ensure the Style Selection Box is shows the quesiton style you want to change. In the example below it is set to Multi Choice, so all questions set to the same style (Multi Choice) will have the boxes altered.
    3. Select Image from the drop-down list of available options.
    Using an image for the check box
    1. The check boxes changes to the default picture box for that style.
    2. Click the Image button on the Questionnaire toolbar ribbon. The Image Checkboxes dialog appears.
    Using an image for the check box
    1. If you wish to apply a set of four images, defined using the Snap XMP Desktop graphic box naming convention, check the Synchronise box.
    2. Click the Edit button of the image you wish to change. (Any image if the Synchronise box is checked.)

    The Image Properties dialog appears.

    Image Properties dialog
    1. Click Browse to select a new image file. The Files of type is the type of box that you are editing. If you wish to view graphics files where the file name does not match the convention for the box type, change this setting.
    2. If you have selected a .gif image, you may tint it by selecting a color in the Colourize Gif box.
    3. Click OK to use the selected image.

    Snap XMP Desktop Graphic Box Naming Convention

    Images used for check-boxes can be in .bmp, .gif or .jpg format. They can be of any size or shape. If you are combining images into sets (so you can use the Synchronise feature to have matched boxes), you must use the Snap file naming convention to identify box graphics. If your set of images is identified by Name, Snap XMP Desktop expects the images to have these file names.

     

    Checked

    Unchecked

    Check box

    Check-Name-On

    Check-Name-Off

    Radio button

    Radio-Name-On

    Radio-Name-Off

    So, if you have a set of mouth images in gif format, you might call them Check-mouth-On.gif, Check-mouth-Off.gif, Radio-mouth-On.gif and Radio-mouth-Off.gif.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Changing the question boxes appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the spacing in a question https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-spacing-in-a-question/ Wed, 08 Jul 2020 08:38:36 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1379 The spacing elements in a question The elements of a question are separated by spacing elements. The size of these elements is defined by the Tabs entry on the Toolbar topics menu. These elements may be shown or hidden, depending on the type of question. Multi-choice questions For a multi-part question, such as a grid, […]

    The post Changing the spacing in a question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The spacing elements in a question

    The elements of a question are separated by spacing elements.

    The size of these elements is defined by the Tabs entry on the Toolbar topics menu.

    These elements may be shown or hidden, depending on the type of question.

    Multi-choice questions

    Background question elements with labels

    For a multi-part question, such as a grid, there are more elements.

    Elements of a grid first question

    Literal question spacing

    By default, a literal question only displays the Name, text and code box for responses. No other items are visible. The code box is in a space called the box area. The width of these elements is specified in the Tabs item in the toolbar topics list.

    OpenEndedTabsBar.PNG

    The percentage defined for the Name is a percentage of the total column width.

    By default, the space for responses is below the question text. The spaces for the name and the text elements combine to make up the whole width of the column. The space for the Name and the box area also combine to make up the whole width of the column. In this case, the width of the Text space specified in the Tabs toolbar topic is ignored.

    Elements visible in a literal question

    If the space for responses beside the question text, the spaces for Name, Text and the box area take up the whole width of the column. The Text and Box areas share the space available for the question.

    https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/blank_lit_side_lab.png

    The size of the response box is set according to the number of characters that can be entered in it. If it needs to be larger than the width that is available, it will extend downwards to ensure there is enough space. You can set the response box size in the Boxes toolbar topic or in the Variable properties dialog.

    OpenEndedBoxesBar.PNG

    The size of the Text box is set as a percentage in the Tabs box. It is a percentage of the space available for the question, not a percentage of the whole column width.

    Hidden space

    The box area is between two spaces, the code offset and the code verge. These specify how much space there is before and after the box area. By default, this is set to zero. The code offset and code verges are taken out of the space available for the response.

    Code offset and code verge in a literal question

    You increase the code offset and code verge size using the Tabs item in the Toolbar topics list. Tabs values are in percentages. If you set the Code offset value to 10%, and the Code verge value to 15%, you then have 75% of the response space available for the box.

    This means that the same tab values for code offset and code verge on a question with a response to the side or beneath, will produce different sizes of space, as the total space available for responses is different. The two diagrams below show a question with 10% code offset and 15% code verge tabs with the question above or beside the response.

    https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/col_down_quest.png
    Across literal question showing offsets

    Multi-choice and grid question spacing

    The elements visible in a multi-choice question are very similar to those in a literal question.

    Multi-choice spacing elements

    There is an additional area for the Code Label. This is prefixed by a code offset, which specifies the space between the code label and the previous element. There is also a code verge area, which defines the space between the box and the edge of the questionnaire (or the column in multi-column questionnaires)

    Grid questions are essentially a stack of multi-choice questions. By default, they have extra areas for the Grid Name and the Grid Label.

    Grid question background areas

    The space between the columns of the grid (not shown on the diagram) is the Code Gutter.

    The post Changing the spacing in a question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Variables https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/working-with-variables/ Tue, 07 Jul 2020 13:24:52 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1331 All questions in a questionnaire are a form of variable. When you create a question in Design mode you create a variable used in the structure of all the editions of a survey. In addition, you can create extra variables that are not part of the questionnaire. In the Variable window, information is held on: […]

    The post Variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    All questions in a questionnaire are a form of variable. When you create a question in Design mode you create a variable used in the structure of all the editions of a survey.

    In addition, you can create extra variables that are not part of the questionnaire.

    • Derived variables allow you to manipulate data in existing variables and convert it to other values.
    • System variables provide data generated by the system (such as the case number or the time that a survey was completed)
    • Pre-coded variables provide a way at looking the questionnaire data dependent upon its position in the data file. They are generally used in the analysis of imported files.

    In the Variable window, information is held on:

    • how the data is stored
    • the order and conditions under which a question is asked

    Showing variable properties in the Questionnaire window

    1. Each variable has a set of individual properties. The properties depend on the type of question. You can examine and change the properties when you are in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select one or more questions.
    3. Click VariablePropsIcon.png to display the Variable Properties dialog box , or right-click and select Variable Properties from the context menu
    4. The Variable Properties dialog will be displayed
    Variable Properties dialog
    1. You can then edit the property values. If you have selected several questions of the same type, you can change any properties they share.

    The Variables window

    The Variables window displays a summary list of all the variables in your survey, whether visible in the questionnaire or not.

    You can choose whether variables are listed alphabetically or by question order in the Variable Tailoring dialog by selecting the Tailor|Variables menu option.

    You can drag and drop items from the Variables window into analysis definitions.

    Variables window showing the list of variables in the survey
    Name Name of the variable you currently have selected, for example: Q1
    Label Variable label (usually the question text)
    Type Type of the variable
    Question Standard question with question text. Can appear in questionnaire
    Derived Variable that contains manipulated data. Can be used as a dynamic variable in questionnaire but completed by respondent
    Note Title, sub-title or instruction. No associated response
    Response Response types shown will depend on the question type selected. The response will determine the number of replies that are possible and the way in which they are recorded when data entry is completed.
    Single Allows one answer to be stored.
    Multiple Allows more than one answer.
    Quantity Requires a number
    Date Accepts suitable date formats, e.g. dd/mm/yy.
    Time Accepts suitable time formats, e.g. 2.30pm.
    Literal Accepts any text
    Codes Number of answer codes (possible responses). Quantities and literals give 1.
    Sequence Position of the variable within the question order
    Valid Number of valid responses received (invalid responses will be tagged as “No Reply”, “Not Asked” or “Error”)
    No Reply Number of No Reply responses received
    Not Asked Number of Not Asked responses. Snap has the ability to skip over questions that are not relevant. If a question has been skipped, it will be identified as “not asked”.
    Errors Number of response errors or invalid responses

    Reserved keywords

    There are two reserved keywords in Snap XMP, which means they cannot be used as variable names:

    • pID (used for participant ID)
    • rID (used for response ID)

    The reserved keywords are not case sensitive. If someone were to create a survey and have these as named variables then manual seeding of the url will not work because Snap Online is already using them.

    Creating new variables

    You create new variables every time you add a question in Questionnaire design. It is also possible to create them in the Variables window. This allows you to create variables that are not included in the questionnaire, such as derived variables.

    1. You can open the Variables window in three ways
      • click the Variables button VariablesIcon.png on the main toolbar
      • select the menu option View | Variables
      • press Ctrl + R
    2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to open the Variable Details window to create a new variable.
    3. You are prompted for the next variable name. It will create a multiple response question variable by default.
    Selecting a code label in the Variable Details window
    1. Make the changes you need and click on SaveIcon.png to save them and return to the Variables window. Alternatively, click tempsnip.png to abandon any changes.

    If you need to see the fields for Sequence, Length, Must Answer, Ordering, Min, Max, Exclusive, Patterns or Mask click DesignModeIcon.png to hide the question text. Click DesignModeIcon.png again to display the question text.

    Editing variables

    Once a variable has been created, you can change it. Care should be taken to ensure that any case data already entered does not become “invalid”.

    1. Open the Variables window by clicking the Variables button VariablesIcon.png on the main toolbar or the menu option View | Variables or press Ctrl + R.
    Variables window with Q9 selected
    1. Select the variable to change. If the survey has many variables, it may be faster to select View | Go To or press F4 to display the Select by Name dialog
    Find a variable using the variable name
    1. Enter a variable name or a letter and click OK to select it in the variable list.
    2. Press Enter, click VariablePropsIcon.png or double-click to open the Variable Details dialog.
    Editing a label in the Variable Details window
    1. To add a code, place the cursor in the Label field and click NewSurveyIcon.png or press Tab on the last code. A new code will be inserted after the selected code. The value given to the code will be next available value. In the example the new code 2 has the value 4 as it was the fourth item created in the list.
    2. Make the changes you need and click on SaveIcon.png to save them and return to the Variables window. Alternatively, click tempsnip.png to abandon any changes.

    Cloning or copying variables and variable codes

    In many questionnaires there are often questions that are very similar. This is particularly true for attitude questions, where views are being sought on a number of topics, and the range of possible answers or codes is the same for all questions.

    You can copy the contents of one variable to a new variable and change key items of information such as variable name and sequence. The technique is referred to as cloning.

    1. Open the Variables window by clicking the Variables button VariablesIcon.png on the main toolbar or the menu option View | Variables or press Ctrl + R
    Variables window showing the list of variables in the survey
    1. Highlight the variable that you wish to copy and click CloneSurveyIcon.png or use the menu option Edit | Clone or the shortcut Ctrl + O.
    2. A new variable will be created with a new variable name. The new variable will be given the default name of the next available question or next available grid question. In the example the variable Q8 is selected and the next available question is Q11 so a cloned variable will be given this name. If the original variable is a grid question with a name such as Q1a, the new one will be Q1b. The variable name can be changed to a different name that is unique for the selected questionnaire.
    Variable Details dialog
    1. Both the sequence number and the values are incremented, based on the information held in the variable being cloned.
    2. Change any question text or variable label information, and when complete, click on SaveIcon.png to save the new variable and return to the Variables window.

    Deleting variables

    You can delete unwanted variables from a survey.

    If you have any data for the variable:

    • you will be unable to retrieve and analyse it
    • the data will have been stored on the raw data case in a specific source
    1. Select the variable to be deleted, by highlighting it in the Variables window
    2. Delete the variable by
      • clicking DeleteSurveyIcon.png
      • selecting the menu option Edit | Delete
      • pressing Delete
    3. A dialog will appear asking you to confirm that you wish to delete the variable from the survey. Click OK to confirm the deletion and Cancel

    Viewing sources and dependents

    You cannot delete a variable if its definition refers to another variable as there is a dependency.

    This happens when a variable is:

    • used in routing
    • used by a derived variable
    • inserted in the label of a variable
    • used in an analysis variable

    You can view Sources and Dependents by clicking SourceDependIcon.PNG .

    1. Click VariablesIcon.png to open the Variables window.
    2. Highlight the variable you wish to inspect and click SourceDependIcon.PNG .
    3. The Sources/Dependencies window opens, showing the selected variable together with any source variables (variables that it depends on) and any variables, reports or analyses that depend on it.

    In the example below, the variable Q3a depends on Q3, as Q3a is only asked if the respondent answers Other to Q3. You cannot delete Q3 until the Not Asked condition in Q3a is removed.

    Source and dependencies of the selected variable

    In the Sources/Dependencies window you can

    • check the details of a dependent by selecting it and clicking VariablePropsIcon.png
    • display the sources/dependencies of a variable by selecting it and clicking SourceDependIcon.PNG or double-clicking the variable
    • move to the previous view in the Sources/Dependencies window by clicking UndoIcon.png
    • move forward by clicking RedoIcon.png

    Deleting answer codes

    1. Open the Variables window by clicking the Variables button VariablesIcon.png on the main toolbar or the menu option View | Variables or press Ctrl + R.
    2. Select the variable to change. Press Enter, click VariablePropsIcon.png or double-click to open the Variable Details dialog.
    3. Select the code to be deleted by clicking on the Label field.
    4. Delete the code by clicking DeleteSurveyIcon.png or by selecting the menu option Edit | Delete.
    5. Click SaveIcon.png to save the changes.

    Reporting on variables

    Summary and full reports can be produced of all variables in a survey or from a specified list.

    1. Click PrintIcon.PNG on the Variable window toolbar to display the Print Variable Details dialog. You can also select File | Print Report, or press Ctrl + P.
    Print the details of the survey variables
    1. Select the report settings you would like.
    Title The title appears at the top of the report.
    All All variables in the Variables window will be included in the report. When the selection field is cleared All is automatically selected.
    Specify selection The selected list of variables will be included in the report. When you enter a selection Specify selection is automatically selected. You can use a comma separated list or the word to for a range. Selecting a group of variables in the Variables window prior to opening the Print Variable Details dialog will automatically enter this selection.

    Style

    You can choose from Summary, Details (single column), Details (double column). Summary prints a list of the variables as shown in the Variables window. The Details report prints the variable details, including codes and values for each variable. The format selected determines whether the data is printed in a single column or double column format.
    Print Prints the selected report.
    Setup

    Opens the Page Setup dialog to specify the layout of your report.

    1. When your selection is complete, press Print to output the required report.

    The post Variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Moving, deleting and copying questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/moving-deleting-and-copying-questions/ Tue, 07 Jul 2020 13:16:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1317 Question ordering You can move questions within your survey. You can turn on automatic-renumbering so that the question numbers change when they move. If you wish to retain question numbers, turn automatic re-numbering off. Double click to turn on automatic re-numbering. The toolbar icon will appear indented. Single click turns automatic re-numbering off. You can […]

    The post Moving, deleting and copying questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Question ordering

    You can move questions within your survey. You can turn on automatic-renumbering so that the question numbers change when they move. If you wish to retain question numbers, turn automatic re-numbering off.

    Double click RenumberIcon.png to turn on automatic re-numbering. The toolbar icon will appear indented.

    Single click turns automatic re-numbering off. You can manually renumber by a single click in this mode.

    Moving questions

    1. Select the question you wish to move. You can select any part of the question.
    2. Use Ctrl and Image: Up Arrow to move the selected question up the questionnaire and Ctrl and Down Arrow to move it down.

    If the Auto Renumber feature is on, the question numbers re-number automatically as you move the questions. If it is not activate, click RenumberIcon.png once to re-number the questionnaire after you have made your changes.

    Selecting consecutive items

    You can select any number of consecutive questions or codes at a time for copying, deleting or moving. As an example, the following shows how to move an entire grid of questions.

    1. Identify the first question of the block and click anywhere in it.
    2. Then either drag down with the left mouse button depressed, or use Shift + Down Arrow to select the required questions.
    3. Now do what you want to the selection. In this case, move the block of questions by using Ctrl + Down Arrow to move the questions further down in the questionnaire.
    4. When the move is complete click on the renumber button RenumberIcon.png if required.

    Cloning or copying questions

    1. Position the cursor somewhere in the question you wish to clone.
    2. Use the CloneSurveyIcon.png button to copy the contents of the question to a new one immediately after the current one. This copies the style settings and calculates the next available question number in the sequence.
    3. You are now able to make any modifications to the new question
    4. If auto renumbering is switched off, you may need to click RenumberIcon.png to re-sequence the entire questionnaire.

    Inserting a question

    1. Click the NewSurveyIcon.png button on the questionnaire toolbar to insert a new question before the currently selected question.
    2. Press Enter to add a new question after the current question.
    3. Click on the button RenumberIcon.png to renumber the questionnaire after you have added questions and auto-numbering is not switched on.

    Deleting a question

    1. To delete an entire question, click in any part of the question and click on the DeleteSurveyIcon.png button.
    2. Click on the button RenumberIcon.png to renumber the questionnaire after you have deleted questions and auto-numbering is not switched on.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Moving, deleting and copying questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adding a question using the Reference window https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-a-question-using-the-reference-window/ Tue, 07 Jul 2020 13:03:10 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1294 Open the Reference window by clicking the button of the main program toolbar. Close all other windows except for the Questionnaire window. Select Window | Tile so that the two windows are arranged side by side on the screen. Double-click on the Personal Demographics category in the Reference SurveyPak. Find the topic or variables in […]

    The post Adding a question using the Reference window appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
  • Open the Reference window by clicking the ReferenceIcon.png button of the main program toolbar. Close all other windows except for the Questionnaire window.
  • Select Window | Tile so that the two windows are arranged side by side on the screen.
  • Double-click on the Personal Demographics category in the Reference SurveyPak.
  • Find the topic or variables in the Reference window that you wish to use in your survey.
  • Viewing the demographics questions available in the Reference SurveyPak
    1. Drag the question from the SurveyPak into the questionnaire. As you drag the cursor over the questionnaire it changes from https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/18741.bmp to one of these three alternatives:
      • https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/insert_above.png insert the new question before this question.
      • https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/replace.png replace this question with the new one.
      • https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/insert_below.png insert the new question after this question.
    2. When you release the mouse button, the new question is dropped in the position indicated. The dragged question is now part of your questionnaire. You can make changes to the text or add, edit or delete codes in the list.
    3. Check the question numbering is still correct after adding the question. If not, click the RenumberIcon.png button.

    Moving a group of questions into a questionnaire

    SurveyPaks can have defined groups of questions in them. These are identified as sections and questionnaires. Sections are marked by the SectionIcon.PNG icon and questionnaires by the QuestionnaireRefIcon.PNG icon. You can drag all the variables within a group into your survey by dragging the marker into your survey.

    You can also use the Control + Shift keys to select multiple questions within a SurveyPak and drag them in simultaneously.

    The variables are dropped into your questionnaire in the same order that they appear in the topic or section.

    Putting in possible question responses using a code frame

    If you want to add a set of multi-response answers to one of your questions, or change the answer labels that you already have, you can do so using a code frame. A code frame is a set of responses with their labels.

    To add or overwrite responses to a question:

    1. Select the question you wish to change in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select the code frame you wish to use in the Reference window.
    3. Drag the code frame over the selected question. When the cursor changes to https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/replace.png , drop it in place.

    Below the image shows that the Rating scale selected in the Reference window has been dragged and dropped on Q8 to automatically insert the codes.

    Inserting a code frame into the questionnaire

    If you drop a code frame over a grid first question, all the grid questions will be converted to the new responses.

    Finding a question in a SurveyPak

    You can look through the questions in a SurveyPak by:

    • opening topics and seeing what questions are listed
    • selecting a language and seeing the questions available in that language
    • using a filter to select questions containing a specified word or phrase

    Browsing SurveyPaks

    The topics in the SurveyPak are displayed in a hierarchical tree structure in the top pane.

    To open a topic folder, double-click the folder or click on the OpenFolderIcon.PNG sign to the left of the folder.

    Viewing the demographics questions available in the Reference SurveyPak

    The folder opens and displays its contents, either more folders or questions.

    The type of question is identified by the icon by it.

    OpenEndedIcon.png Open variable (quantity, literal, date, time)
    MultiChoiceIcon.png Multiple or single-response variable
    Derived variable icon Snap WebHost Derived variable
    CodeFrameIcon.png Code frame
    NoteIcon.png Note variable

    Viewing variables available in other languages

    1. Click ReferenceIcon.png or press Alt+F12 and select the survey or SurveyPak containing the questions you are interested in.
    2. Select the language of your choice in the drop-down list. If the language is not visible in the list, then it is not available in the stored survey or SurveyPak. If a specified language has not been added to the current open survey, its name will be greyed out in the language list. You can still select it and examine the questions.
    3. Questions that are available in the chosen languages will be displayed.

    If the current open survey is multi-language, and questions in the SurveyPak are not available in all the languages used in the survey, then those questions will be in grey. Questions available in all languages used in the survey are in black.

    Using a filter to search for a question

    You can apply a filter to a whole SurveyPak or survey, a topic within a SurveyPak or an existing filter.

    1. Select the item that you wish to filter. There are two ways to add a filter
      • Click the filter button FilterIcon.png on the Reference window toolbar
      • Right click the area to be filtered and select Add Filter… from the context menu.
    2. This displays the New Text Filter dialog. Enter the word or phrase that you wish to search for in the Find field. You can use the wildcard character * to represent missing characters and the keywords AND, OR, NEAR, AFTER and BEFORE.
    3. The filter and its contents are displayed in the Reference window.
    4. To delete a filter you can right-click the filter in the Reference window and select Delete from the context menu or highlight the filter and press the Delete key.

    The post Adding a question using the Reference window appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Capturing an interview location https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/capturing-an-interview-location/ Tue, 07 Jul 2020 11:04:10 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1254 You can set up an online survey so that you can store the location where the interview is conducted. This only works if the survey is running on a device which can capture geolocation information, such as a GPS-enabled tablet. You could either use a web browser to view the survey or use the Interviewer […]

    The post Capturing an interview location appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can set up an online survey so that you can store the location where the interview is conducted.

    This only works if the survey is running on a device which can capture geolocation information, such as a GPS-enabled tablet. You could either use a web browser to view the survey or use the Interviewer app to run the survey on the mobile device.

    This facility is most useful when you wish to record geolocations when carrying out interviews with using the Interviewer app.

    Setting up the location variable

    Location variables are only useful if you are creating an online survey that is used on a mobile device, or a mobile survey for the Interviewer app. Location data is only available in Snap XMP Online and Interviewer editions.

    1. Select a mobile edition in your questionnaire.
    2. Click QuestionnairePropsIcon.png to display the Questionnaire Properties dialog box.
    3. Scroll down the options on the left to find the Paradata section.
    4. Highlight the Geolocation field and check the box marked Use in survey.
    Display the Geolocation paradata in the questionnaire
    1. Press OK to return to the questionnaire.
    2. The ID.location variable will appear below the title.
    Select the location paradata question name
    1. To hide the variable name on the questionnaire, highlight the text ID.location, and select the Show toolbar option.
    2. Select Name in the next dropdown list if not displayed and uncheck the Show box. The ID.location text will be hidden.
    3. Change the default text to “Current location: please wait until the location has been found.” This will ensure that the interviewer allows the device some time to find the location.
    4. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the changes to the questionnaire.

    Configure the GPS timeout and accuracy

    The two main methods of getting a location are using GPS or using information from mobile phone masts. GPS is more accurate but uses more battery power.

    Note: Unless you know who is running your survey and what device it will run on, you cannot be sure whether the device running the survey has either of these methods enabled.

    You can set a time limit on how long the survey will spend looking for location information and how accurate you would like the information to be.

    1. Click QuestionnairePropsIcon.png to display the Questionnaire Properties dialog box.
    2. Scroll down the options on the left to find the Paradata section.
    Configure the geolocation paradata in questionnaire properties
    1. Highlight the Geolocation field and click Configure to open the Configure Geolocation dialog
    Configure geolocation
    1. Set Timeout to how long (in seconds) that you want the device to keep searching for a location. The longer it searches the more battery it uses.
    2. Set Target accuracy to the precision that you would like to try and achieve. This is only a guide as the device may not be able to be this accurate.
    3. Press OK to return to the questionnaire.

    You have no control over whether people permit the survey to use geolocation information, or whether their device is able to provide accurate geolocation information. If people are looking at surveys with a PC, the location provided may be that of a router.

    Using location data in analyses

    Geolocation data is captured in the ID.location variable in WGS84 (World Geodesic System) format. You can export the variable data for further analysis. The variable can either contain location data or an error code if the location data was not found.

    You can extract the separate elements of the location data by using the system patterns geo unavailable and geolocation provided.

    Element Text
    Latitude ID.location as geo latitude
    Longitude ID.location as geo longitude
    Altitude ID.location as geo altitude
    ± Accuracy of location in meters ID.location as geo accuracy
    Error code ID.location as geo unavailable

    Example

    Create a derived variable to extract the longitude to 3 decimal places. You need to add the paradata ID.location to your survey as a prerequisite.

    1. Click VariablesIcon.png to display the Variables Window.
    2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new variable.
    3. Specify the Variable Details:
      • Name: Latitude
      • Label: Latitude
      • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from other existing variables).
      • Response: Quantity
      • Decimals: To access the Decimals field, click DesignModeIcon.png . Change the figure from 0 to 3.
    4. In the Code list, alongside the label Not asked, enter the value “unless ((ID.location as geo unavailable == “”)” to check that you are using a valid location.
    5. In the Code list, alongside the label Valid, enter the value “ID.Location as geo latitude”. This returns the latitude of the interview location, which you can use for analysis and reporting.
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the variable.

    Exporting the location data

    A common use for geolocation data is to export the data and use it with a mapping API, such as Google Maps. You can export the data directly in WGS84 format, or you can create derived variables to convert the data to a specified format.

    1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Data Entry DataEntryIcon.pngto open the Data Entry window.
    2. Select File | Export to display the Data Export dialog.
    1. In Format, select the file format for the data export.
    2. Select File as the destination and enter an appropriate filename.
    3. In Content, enter the name of the variable(s) to export. The example shows ID.location
    4. Click OK to export the location data.

    The post Capturing an interview location appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting a Page Break, Column Break and Section Break https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-a-page-break-column-break-and-section-break/ Tue, 07 Jul 2020 10:19:26 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1220 Page Breaks Inserting a page break starts a new page and separates the questions onto different pages. To introduce a page break you have three alternatives. Click the right hand mouse button and select Break|Page Break Press Ctrl + Shift + B to insert a page break above the selected question Select the Break option […]

    The post Inserting a Page Break, Column Break and Section Break appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Page Breaks

    Inserting a page break starts a new page and separates the questions onto different pages. To introduce a page break you have three alternatives.

    • Click the right hand mouse button and select Break|Page Break
    • Press Ctrl + Shift + B to insert a page break above the selected question
    • Select the Break option in the Toolbar Topics list and check or clear the Page Break box.
    Topics toolbar showing page break settings

    You may remove a break by repeating these actions to toggle the break on and off.

    It is recommended to insert your own page breaks to ensure:

    • the login page contains all the text you require
    • each survey page fits onto a screen without scrolling
    • when designing for mobile surveys there is a limited amount of screen space available and you may want to insert more page breaks so each page only has a few questions

    Column Breaks

    Inserting a column break starts a new column and separates the questions onto different pages. To introduce a column break you have three alternatives.

    • Click the right hand mouse button and select Break|Column Break
    • Press Ctrl + Shift + A to insert or remove a column break above the selected question
    • Select the Break option in the Toolbar Topics list and check or clear the Column Break box.
    Topics toolbar showing column break settings

    You may remove a break by repeating these actions to toggle the break on and off.

    Adjust the columns for a single question

    1. Select the question and set the toolbar topic to Columns. The toolbar shows the number of columns used for the current style, together with Grid, Full Page, Down and Across buttons.
    2. Change the setting as required. Increasing the columns will display the codes across the screen and decreasing the columns will display the codes vertically.
    3. Select Full Page to stretch the question across the width of the page or screen.

    Section Breaks

    A section break starts a new section on the same page. They are used to divide your questionnaire into relevant sections so a different numbering system can be displayed in each section.

    To introduce a section break you have two alternatives.

    • Click the right hand mouse button and select Break|Section Break
    • Select the Break option in the Toolbar Topics list and check or clear the Section Break box.
    Topics toolbar showing section break settings
    1. When you create a section break the New Section Break dialog will be displayed.
    Insert a new section break
    1. Select Start using numbered sections from the dialog box. This will divide the questionnaire into two sections placing a section break above the selected question and the questions will have a new numbering system. For example, the first question in the first section will be Q1.1, the second question will be Q1.2; the first question in the second section will be Q2.1 etc.
    2. The other option Start using lettered sections will start a new numbering system beginning with letters, for example, the question you have selected will be renamed B1 and the section above will rename Q1 to A1, A2 etc.
    3. Select the OK button and the questionnaire is updated with the new sections and numbering system.
    4. A section break mark is placed in the questionnaire. It can be removed again by clearing the Section Break check box.

    Using the Section button

    1. Select Break in the toolbar topics menu.
    2. Click Section… on the toolbar to open the Section break properties dialog.
    Section break properties dialog
    1. If “Use Custom Name” is selected, type in the number or letter format to be used in the section. Also ensure either a number or letter format is selected in the “Type of Sections” box.
    2. Click OK.
    3. A dialog will appear asking if you wish to renumber the questionnaire. Click OK. The questionnaire will be renumbered and the new numbering system displayed on the questionnaire.

    The post Inserting a Page Break, Column Break and Section Break appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adding notes and questions to your questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-notes-and-questions-to-your-questionnaire/ Tue, 07 Jul 2020 10:11:24 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1201 Question styles In Snap XMP Desktop, you add questions and notes to create your questionnaire. There are a number of pre-defined question types, referred to as question styles. The styles differ in their appearance and type of response. The styles appear different for different outputs, for example, a web questionnaire will look different to a […]

    The post Adding notes and questions to your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Question styles

    In Snap XMP Desktop, you add questions and notes to create your questionnaire. There are a number of pre-defined question types, referred to as question styles. The styles differ in their appearance and type of response. The styles appear different for different outputs, for example, a web questionnaire will look different to a paper questionnaire for scanning, even though the styles have the same names.

    There are a large number of different question styles supplied with Snap XMP. They are all available for use in Snap XMP Desktop. We have developed a sample questionnaire that shows the different question styles. You can use this questionnaire to see how the questions behave in a live interview.

    Question styles supplied with Snap XMP

    Notes

    StyleDescription
    Title Notes and headings are regularly required in a questionnaire. The title is normally used for the main heading.
    Sub Title Other notes are generally required to separate sections in a questionnaire or provide instructions for completion.
    Instruction A variation on Title and Sub-title, the instruction style can be used anywhere on the questionnaire as notes for the respondent or the interviewer.

    Questions

    StyleDescription
    Multi Choice A question with tick or check boxes, where the respondent can either respond with a single answer or a number of answers. This is sometimes known as a “closed” question.
    Single Choice A multi-choice question where the respondent can select a single answer
    Drop down This displays the options a respondent can select as a drop-down list
    Map control This allows you to display the possible options as clickable regions of a picture
    Slider control The slider control style allows you to display the possible options as an interactive graphic
    Grid First Grid questions are variations on Multi Choice questions, but are laid out in a different format, with headings for each of the boxes presented across the page.
    Grid Next In a series of grid questions, the headings across the top are suppressed for all subsequent questions, and just the boxes appear.
    Open Ended A question with an answer in the form of free-format text, a number, a date or a time.
    Open First To collect series of free format text or numbers in a series, this style provides an initial question heading and then a list of groups, products, services etc.
    Open Next The open first questions are continued as Open Next, leaving out the initial question name and question text.
    Other Many Multi Choice questions have a list of codes and then an “other please specify”. This style provides free format text as an addition to an existing tick box question.
    Semantic Scale First The semantic scale questions are designed to let respondents choose a point on a scale between words with opposite meanings
    Semantic Scale Next The semantic scale next allows you to have a grid of semantic scale questions

    Response types

    You can set the type of response required from the participant for some of the question styles.

    No response

    These styles are used to give information. They provide the title, instructions and notes in your questionnaire.

    Select a response

    People can select one or more pre-defined answers.

    Examples can include

    • a single question asking what age range the respondent is in
    • a grid of questions asking respondents to rate different aspects of a service

    These types of questions are also known as coded questions, as the respondent must select one or more question codes as their answer.

    They can appear as drop-down lists, lines or grids of response boxes, interactive images or sliders and semantic scales.

    Open response

    Participants can enter data by writing in a box. The data can be free format text or a number. During a live interview, the data entered can be checked to see if it is in the correct format. You can use or create a pattern to define the expected format, for example, a phone number or zip code. You can specify whether the response is a quantity, a date or time, or free text.

    Saving your questionnaire

    As you create your questionnaire, make sure that you save your questions and other changes regularly.

    • Click Save SaveIcon.png on the Questionnaire window toolbar to save changes to the questionnaire.

    Inserting notes in your questionnaire

    Notes are questions that provide text information and include

    • Title
    • Sub Title
    • Instruction

    You add a note to your questionnaire by inserting text in one of these styles.

    Inserting a title or sub-title

    A questionnaire normally starts with a heading together with text to explain its purpose and how it should be completed. As soon as a new questionnaire starts, there are placeholders for a title and then a sub-title.

    1. In the area marked “Click here for text”, type the name of your survey. The style displayed in the ribbon at the top of the window is pre-set to Title. The default layout and font for the title is black text in Arial font on a white background.
    2. Press Enter when you have set up your title. This displays a sub-title area automatically. The Sub Title style is on the toolbar.
    3. Type your sub-title text.
    InsertTitle.PNG
    1. Press Enter when you have set up your title and sub-title.

    The text of the sub-title automatically moves onto the next line as you type. If you want to force a new line as part of the text of the title or sub-title, click on the appropriate location and press Shift and Enter.

    Inserting an instruction

    An Instruction can appear anywhere in the questionnaire and can be a note to an interviewer or guidelines to a respondent on how to complete the next section of the questionnaire.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question when you have set up your title and sub-title.
    2. Change the style to Instruction in the style selection box. This allows you to enter free format text that appears across the entire column of the questionnaire. This is no associated box or line.
    3. Type your instruction or information text in the box.

    Inserting Single Choice questions

    Single Choice questions let the respondent select one response from a list. They are single response questions, by default, and display as radio buttons to show the respondent that they should only choose one answer.

    1. Press Enter to start a new question after the currently selected question. By default, this is a single response question and the question style is Single Choice on the toolbar, showing radio buttons as the response box style.
    1. You can see an area with “Click here for text”. Type your question text here.
    2. Press the Tab key on your keyboard and the cursor will move into an area by the first box, labelled “Code Label”. Type your first answer code here then press Tab to create and move to the next code label.
    3. Continue with the text for the other code labels and press Tab after each one.
    4. When you have finished the question you can press Enter to start the next question.

    Showing questions as a drop-down

    You can show Single Choice questions, Multi Choice questions and Grid rows as drop-downs.

    To switch between the drop-down list or separate boxes:

    1. In the questionnaire window, select the question that you wish to turn into a drop-down.
    1. Select Show in the toolbar, then select As Drop-down in the next drop-down list
    2. Select the Show box to show the question as a drop-down. The question is now shown as a drop-down.
    1. Clear the Show box to show the question as response boxes.

    Inserting Multi Choice questions

    Multi Choice questions let a respondent select one or more responses from a list. They are multiple response questions, by default, and display as check boxes to show the respondent that they can choose more than one answer.

    1. Press Enter to start a new question after the currently selected question. By default, this is a single response question and the question style is Single Choice on the toolbar.
    2. Select the drop-down list on the toolbar where it says Single Choice and change it to Multi Choice by choosing Multi Choice in the Style selection drop-down menu. The shape of the response boxes changes from a radio button to a checkbox.
    MultiChoiceQu.png
    1. You can see an area with “Click here for text”. Type your question text here.
    2. Press the Tab key on your keyboard and the cursor will move into an area by the first box, labelled “Code Label”. Type your first answer code here then press Tab to create and move to the next code label.
    3. Continue with the text for the other code labels and press Tab after each one.
    4. When you have finished the question you can press Enter to start the next question or press Ctrl + Enter if you wish to add an “Other” question.

    Inserting an “Other” question

    When you are creating a list of items it is likely the list will not contain every answer and you may want to collect further information from the respondent. Snap XMP Desktop has a pre-defined style called Other to collect such text, and is designed in such a way that it appears as part of the main question with its list of codes.

    1. When you complete your list of choices, use Ctrl + Enter to add an Other section to a Multi Choice question. The layout of an Other means that the question number will not appear, the text of the question will move up below the last code and a larger box will appear for a written answer.
    2. In the area marked “Click here for text”, type your question text.
    3. To make the box big enough to hold a long response, hold down the Ctrl key and press the + key on the numeric keypad. Press Ctrl and – to make the box smaller.

    Inserting a Grid question

    A Grid is made up of a series of Single Response questions, which have exactly the same choice of answers, organised in grid rows. Often they ask for people’s attitude towards something. In Snap XMP Desktop, a grid uses the styles Grid First and Grid Next.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Grid First. This will allow you to set up the headings for the first of a series of grid questions.
    GridFirst.png
    1. In the area marked Click here for text, type your question text, for example “How did you rate the following?” Press the Tab key on your keyboard.
    2. The cursor will now move to the list of codes across the top of the first grid question. Type the first of the possible answers, such as “Good”. Press Tab to create the next code. Type each subsequent answer and follow each by pressing Tab. After the last code press Down Arrow instead of Tab.
    3. The cursor will move to the text of the first Grid Label. Type the first item, such as “Speed of service” and press Tab.
    GridNext.PNG
    1. This creates the next grid row automatically changing the style to Grid Next for the second and subsequent rows. Type the next Grid Label.
    2. Press Tab to create another grid row or press Enter to complete the grid and move to a new question.

    Inserting a semantic scale

    Semantic scale questions allow you to measure people’s attitudes towards contrasting adjectives or objects. Each pair of items is at opposite ends of a bipolar scale. You can insert a group of semantic scale questions together.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Semantic Scale First. If it is not available in the list, select More Styles and scroll to Semantic Scale First in the Style Picker dialog, then click OK. This creates an empty question with two codes.
    SemanticScaleFirst.PNG
    1. Type your question text, for example “How would you describe the product?” Press the Down Arrow key to move to the first label. Type the adjective at one end of the scale, such as “Cheap”.
    2. Press the Image: Right Arrow key to move to the first code in the question.
    3. Press Tab to add further codes
    4. Press the Image: Right Arrow key to move to the second label and type the adjective at the other end of the scale (such as “Expensive”).
    SemanticScaleFirst2.PNG
    1. Press Tab if you wish to create a grid of semantic scale questions or press Enter to create a new question.

    Inserting an Open ended question

    You can use an Open question to collect free format text, numbers, dates or times. There are three alternative styles to use

    • Open Ended is for a single free format response.
    • Open Grid First and Open Grid Next are for free format responses for a series of similar questions, which can come under the same overall question heading.

    Inserting Open Ended (literal) questions

    Use an Open Ended question to collect free format text, number, date or time. A common use is to provide space for general comments.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Open Ended, which allows the respondent to enter free format text.
    OpenEnded.PNG
    1. Use Click on the box that reads Click here for text and type in your question text.
    2. To make the box bigger hold down the Ctrl key and press the + key. Press Ctrl and to make the box smaller.

    Creating a grid of literal questions

    You can create a grid of open ended questions where respondents can enter their own answers.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Open Grid First. This will allow you to set up the heading for the first of a series of questions, each of which can contain numbers or text.
    OpenGridFirst.PNG
    1. Click on the box that reads Click here for text. Type your question text and press Down Arrow or Tab.
    2. The cursor will move to the Grid Label of the first row where you can enter your text. Use Ctrl and + to make the box larger if necessary.
    3. Press Tab and type the next question text in the next line of the question.
    OpenGridNext.png

    This is an Open Grid Next question. Its question box (and all subsequent boxes) will be the same size as the first box in the question.

    1. If you need more questions press Tab again and repeat the process.

    If you wish to change the responses to quantities, dates or times, select Responses in the toolbar topic. Following questions will keep the new response type and box size.

    OpenGridNextResponse.png

    The post Adding notes and questions to your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing question numbers https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/question-numbers/ Tue, 07 Jul 2020 09:40:28 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1188 By default, the question numbers in Snap XMP Desktop start from Q1 and the question number is stored as the variable name. You can control the appearance of the questions numbers on the questionnaire. In Design mode you can select a different question number style from a list of options as well as change the […]

    The post Changing question numbers appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    By default, the question numbers in Snap XMP Desktop start from Q1 and the question number is stored as the variable name. You can control the appearance of the questions numbers on the questionnaire. In Design mode DesignModeIcon.png you can select a different question number style from a list of options as well as change the appearance of how the numbers are presented. Style mode StyleModeIcon.png allows you to specify the question number options displayed in the list.

    1. Open the Questionnaire window in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png .
    2. Select the question that you wish to change.
    3. Change the toolbar topic to Numbering. There are three controls for numbering.
      • A drop-down list of types of numbering
      • A Name field showing the appearance of the question number
      • A Grid Name field showing the number appearance for grid questions
    NumberingBar.png
    1. Click on an element in the Name or Grid Name boxes to switch its display on or off. Any part that is shown in grey will not be displayed; any part in bold will display. In the example only the letter Q and the number 1 is in bold, everything else is grey.

    Control over the presentation of the numbering of question names does not change the question number stored in the survey. If the numbering system does not use the letter Q, the question Q1 in the questionnaire still has the variable name Q1 in the list of variables.

    Hiding question numbers

    You can hide the question numbers in your survey. This helps in online questionnaires with routing, where you do not want the respondent to see that they are not answering questions in number sequence.

    Hiding all question numbers in your survey

    1. Click StyleModeIcon.png to go into Style mode.
    2. Select All Styles from the style dropdown list.
    3. Select Show from the toolbar topic menu.
    4. Select Name (for question numbers) or Grid Name (for grid question numbers) from the element list.
    HideQuestionNoBar.png
    1. Clear the Show box to hide the question numbers.

    Hiding the question number for an individual question

    1. Click DesignModeIcon.png to go into Design mode.
    2. Select the question.
    3. Select Show from the toolbar topic menu.
    4. Select Name (for question numbers) or Grid Name (for grid question numbers) from the element list.
    HideQuestionNoBar2.PNG
    1. Clear the Show box to hide the question number for the selected question only.

    Changing the texts to remove references to question numbers

    When respondents complete an online questionnaire, they are shown a message if they miss a question that they must answer. By default, these messages contain the question number. If your survey does not display the question number, it is confusing when it appears in a message, so you should change the messages as well. You can do this by editing the messages individually.

    1. Open your survey in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Click Questionnaire Properties QuestionnairePropsIcon.png on the Questionnaire window toolbar to open the Questionnaire Properties dialog.
    3. Scroll down the sections in the left hand pane until you get to Texts https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/ic_texts.png and select it.
    4. Look through the list of texts and edit the text where it refers to question numbers. Question numbers replace the string {question} wherever it appears in the texts.
    5. Click Save As to save all the messages to a new file. You can then use this file in other surveys.
    6. Click OK to save your changes.

    The post Changing question numbers appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Introduction to the Questionnaire window https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/introduction-to-questionnaire-window/ Mon, 06 Jul 2020 10:46:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=1098 Questionnaire design is carried out in the Questionnaire window. Here you can add items questions or notes to create your questionnaire style the way individual questions appear change how the whole questionnaire looks add other items such as video or audio specify how the questions are asked by including routing specify valid answers by using […]

    The post Introduction to the Questionnaire window appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Questionnaire design is carried out in the Questionnaire window.

    Here you can

    • add items questions or notes to create your questionnaire
    • style the way individual questions appear
    • change how the whole questionnaire looks
    • add other items such as video or audio
    • specify how the questions are asked by including routing
    • specify valid answers by using patterns and validation
    • set which editions to publish

    Choosing the questionnaire mode

    The Questionnaire window has three modes to help create your questionnaire.

    DesignModeIcon.png Design mode

    This is the mode you work in when setting up the questionnaire. The Design mode is the default mode selected when the questionnaire window opens. Design mode allows you to specify

    • the questions to be asked
    • formatting individual questions
    • the order in which they will be asked
    • the type of response expected
    • the overall layout of the questionnaire

    StyleModeIcon.png Style mode

    Style mode allows you to format the questionnaire in the same way as Design mode, but is used to make modifications to larger parts of the questionnaire.

    Style mode allows you to

    • change styles
    • rename styles
    • create new styles

    When changing styles, you can

    • only modify the selected style
    • modify all styles related to the selected style
    • modify every style (all questions) within the questionnaire

    DataModeIcon.png Data View mode

    Data View mode allows you to view the current responses to the survey displayed in the questionnaire layout. You can print individual cases, or see a summary of all cases.

    Questionnaire window toolbar

    The Questionnaire window allows you to specify the layout and structure of your questionnaire.

    The Questionnaire buttons and menu options are shown in the table.

    ButtonMenu optionAlternativeDescription
    DesignModeIcon.pngSelected in Design mode.
    StyleModeIcon.pngCtrl + MSwitch to Style mode.
    DataModeIcon.pngCtrl + Shift + DSwitch to Data View mode.
    NewSurveyIcon.pngEdit | NewCtrl + NCreate a new question. The name of the question must be unique within a survey. Digits and stops are allowed, e.g. Q1, Q1.1, Q1a
    CloneSurveyIcon.pngEdit | CloneCtrl + OClone the existing question definition to a new question of a different name.
    DeleteSurveyIcon.pngEdit | DeleteDeleteDelete the current question.
    UndoIcon.pngEdit | UndoCtrl + ZUndo the last action.
    RedoIcon.pngEdit | RedoRedo the last action.
    SaveIcon.pngFile | SaveSave the questionnaire but do not close the Questionnaire window. Only active once changes have been made.
    VariablePropsIcon.pngOpens the Variable Properties dialog. Property values for the selected variable are changed here.
    StylePickerIcon.pngOpens the Style Picker dialog to select a style to apply to a question.
    RoutingIcon.pngOpens the Routing Rules dialog box. Different routing rules can be created here.
    RenumberIcon.pngRenumber the questionnaire. Double-click to switch on auto-renumbering. Single-click to return to manual mode.
    Questionnaire properties buttonFile | Page SetupQuestionnaire Properties. Options available depend on the edition of the questionnaire.
    EditionsIcon.pngFile | EditionsEditions and Style Templates assigns a Format or Language or saves a template of the current questionnaire layout.
    PrintPreviewIcon.pngFile |Print ReportCtrl + PProduce a print preview of the questionnaire with the option to print a copy.
    SpellCheckIcon.pngEdit | Spell checkF9Spell checks the questionnaire.
    ZoomIcon.pngZoom in or out to change the size of the questionnaire on the screen.
    Define external questionnaireDefine scanning. This button is only displayed if the scanning module is installed and a scanning questionnaire is being designed.

    Saving the questionnaire

    The results of your questionnaire design are held in the Questionnaire window, and the SaveIcon.png button can be used at any time to save the questionnaire.

    • Click the SaveIcon.png button or select the File|Save menu to save any changes to the questionnaire
    • Close the Questionnaire window by clicking on https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/409.bmp in the top right corner of the window. Prior to closing you will be asked if you wish to save the changes to the questionnaire.

    Alternatively, if you have made changes to your questionnaire and would like to make a copy, rather than over-writing the original, you can select File | Save As to save the altered version of your questionnaire.

    Zoom

    The displayed size of the questionnaire can be changed by using the Zoom button ZoomIcon.png on the Questionnaire toolbar. This only affects the appearance on the screen; it does not alter the look of the questionnaire when printed. The Zoom setting is stored when the Questionnaire window is closed so it re-opens with the same zoom setting.

    1. Click the Zoom button ZoomIcon.png on the toolbar and a drop-down list of options, from 25% up to 400%, is displayed.
    2. Choose a larger value to zoom in to get a close-up view of your questionnaire.
    3. Choose a smaller value to zoom out to make more questions visible but at a reduced size.
    4. Alternatively you can type in any value between 25% and 400% to display the zoom setting you want.

    Finding text in the questionnaire window

    You can find text in the questionnaire window when you are in Design or Style mode.

    1. Select Find in the toolbar topics drop-down list.
    2. Type in the text that you want to look for in the empty box to the right of the toolbar topics drop-down list in the ribbon.
    Topics toolbar showing find settings
    1. Press Enter. The search starts from the current cursor position to the end of the questionnaire, highlighting the first example of the text being searched for.
    2. Press Enter again and it will search for the next example.
    3. At the end of the questionnaire, you are asked if you wish to continue the search from the beginning of the questionnaire.

    Use the controls FindNextIcon.png to find the next occurrence and FindPrevIcon.png to find the previous occurrence.

    The box containing the search text will store any previous searches in a drop-down list, so you can repeat searches without retyping the text. This list will be cleared when the Questionnaire window is closed.

    Replacing text

    1. Select Edit|Find, Edit|Replace or click FindIcon.png to open the Find/Replace dialog.
    Finding a word in the questionnaire
    1. Enter the text you would like to replace in the Find: field, and the text to replace it in the Replace: field. Note that you can use the Match whole words only and Match case check boxes to make your replacement more precise.

    Spell checking your questionnaire

    1. With the Questionnaire window open, click SpellCheckIcon.png to start a spell check. The spell check searches the entire questionnaire from the current editing position of the cursor.
    2. If a word is found with a spelling mistake, it is displayed in the dialog box and a list of alternative spellings is provided.
      • Click Ignore to leave a word unaltered.
      • Click Ignore All to skip all occurrences of that word.
      • Select Change to put the text in the Change to: box into the text of the questionnaire.
      • Select Change All to change all occurrences of that word to the new spelling.
    Spell checking the questionnaire
    1. At the end of the questionnaire, the spell check automatically restarts at the beginning and only stops when it has checked the entire questionnaire. It will then display a message showing the number of words checked and replaced.
    2. Click OK to return to the survey.

    The default setting for spell checking is to ignore both numbers and partial numbers, so that numbers that appear in questionnaire, such as Q1, Q2A, 100, 1997 will be ignored. You can change these settings by clicking Options to open the Spell Checker Options dialog.

    The post Introduction to the Questionnaire window appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a new survey https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-a-new-survey/ Mon, 06 Jul 2020 10:14:13 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=749 In Snap XMP Desktop there are two types of survey; online surveys and offline surveys. Online surveys are surveys that are available in both Snap XMP Desktop and Snap XMP Online. They can be organised in folders that are shown in both applications. The online surveys are kept up to date and the response data […]

    The post Creating a new survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In Snap XMP Desktop there are two types of survey; online surveys and offline surveys.

    • Online surveys
    • Offline surveys

    Online surveys are surveys that are available in both Snap XMP Desktop and Snap XMP Online. They can be organised in folders that are shown in both applications. The online surveys are kept up to date and the response data synchronized between the two applications.

    Offline surveys are surveys that are available in Snap XMP Desktop only.

    Creating an online survey

    Your Snap XMP Online account must be set up before you can use online surveys in Snap XMP Desktop. Further details can be found in Setting up the online survey framework.

    1. Click Survey Overview SurveyOverviewIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Survey Overview window.
    2. Click Online Surveys 5.OnlineSurveysIcon.png on the Survey Overview toolbar to show the online surveys.
    3. Click 1.NewSurveyIcon.png to create a new online survey.
    4. Choose one of the survey templates as a starting point for the new survey. If there are user-defined survey templates available you can choose User Templates or Snap XMP Templates.
    5. The last used survey template is chosen by default. When you first use Snap XMP Desktop, the Blank Template is selected as the default. This creates a survey with editions for PC/laptop, tablet, phone and paper. Select the survey template and click Next.
    Select the survey template that the survey will be based on
    1. In the New Online Survey dialog, enter a name for the survey and select the folder to add the survey. Click OK.
    New Online Survey dialog
    1. This creates the new survey. You can now build your questionnaire in the Questionnaire window. The tabs for the different editions are shown at the bottom.
    Questionnaire window showing the new survey with the editions tab highlighted

    Creating an offline survey

    1. Click Survey Overview SurveyOverviewIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Survey Overview window.
    2. Click Offline Surveys 6.OfflineSurveysIcon.png on the Survey Overview toolbar to show the offline surveys.
    3. Click 1.NewSurveyIcon.png to create a new offline survey.
    4. Choose one of the survey templates as a starting point for the new survey. If there are user-defined survey templates available you can choose User Templates or Snap Templates.
    Select the User Templates
    1. The last used survey template is chosen by default. When you first use Snap XMP Desktop, the Blank Template is selected as the default. This creates a survey with editions for PC/laptop, tablet, phone and paper. Select the survey template and click Next.
    Select the survey template that the survey will be based on
    1. In the New Survey dialog enter the survey name and title. You can enter further information in the available text fields. Click OK.
    New Survey dialog
    1. This creates the new survey. You can now build your questionnaire in the Questionnaire window. The tabs for the different editions are shown at the bottom.
    Questionnaire window showing the new survey with the editions tab highlighted

    The post Creating a new survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>